Simocode 1

Tooltips SIRIUS +
SIMOCODE ES Online Help ___________________

SIMOCODE 1
___________________
General information 2
___________________
Device configuration 3
SIMOCODE pro
___________________
Diagnostics & Online 4
SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help ___________________

Parameterization of the
modules 5
___________________
Commissioning 6
Programming and Operating Manual
Working with continuous
function charts (CFCs) for 7
SIMOCODE
Migrating a SIMOCODE pro

___________________
project 8
___________________
Additional information 9
08/2013
A5E34383465002A/RS-AA/001
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Copyright © Siemens AG 2013.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 07/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE ..................................................................................................... 13

1.1 Tooltips SiriusPLAT without links ............................................................................................ 13
1.1.1 Device .................................................................................................................................... 13
1.1.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number ..................................................... 13
1.1.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code .......................................................... 13
1.1.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager ............................................................. 13
1.1.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile ............................................................. 13
1.1.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family ...................................................... 13
1.1.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily................................................. 13
1.1.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class ....................................................... 13
1.1.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No. ............................................................. 13
1.1.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level ....................................... 14
1.1.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level ....................................... 14
1.1.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter ................................................. 14
1.1.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version ......................................................... 14
1.1.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data ............................................ 14
1.1.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp......................................................... 14
1.1.2 Fieldbus interface ................................................................................................................... 14
1.1.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block.......................................................................... 14
1.1.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address.............................................................................................. 14
1.1.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address ................................................................................. 15
1.1.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed ................................................................................. 15
1.1.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type ................................................................................................ 15
1.1.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages.............................................................. 15
1.1.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings................................................................ 15
1.1.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults ..................................................................... 15
1.1.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults ....................................................................... 15
1.2 Tooltips SiriusPLAT ................................................................................................................ 16
1.2.1 Device .................................................................................................................................... 16
1.2.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number ..................................................... 16
1.2.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code .......................................................... 16
1.2.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager ............................................................. 16
1.2.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile ............................................................. 16
1.2.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family ...................................................... 16
1.2.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily................................................. 17
1.2.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class ....................................................... 17
1.2.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No.............................................................. 17
1.2.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level ....................................... 17
1.2.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level ....................................... 17
1.2.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter ................................................. 17
1.2.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version ......................................................... 18
1.2.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data ............................................ 18
1.2.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp......................................................... 18
1.2.2 Fieldbus interface ................................................................................................................... 18
1.2.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block.......................................................................... 18
SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

Programming and Operating Manual, 08/2013 3
Table of contents
1.2.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address...............................................................................................19

1.2.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address ..................................................................................19
1.2.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed..................................................................................19
1.2.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type.................................................................................................19
1.2.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages...............................................................20
1.2.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings ................................................................20
1.2.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults ......................................................................20
1.2.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults ........................................................................20
1.3 Module parameters without links .............................................................................................21
1.3.1 Identification ............................................................................................................................21
1.3.1.1 Marking ...................................................................................................................................21
1.3.2 Configuration...........................................................................................................................21
1.3.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module .................................................................21
1.3.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit.............................21
1.3.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit .............................21
1.3.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit .............................22
1.3.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor .......................................................................................................22
1.3.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed ...............................................23
1.3.3 Motor protection ......................................................................................................................23
1.3.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor ............................................................................................23
1.3.4 Motor control ...........................................................................................................................27
1.3.4.1 Control stations .......................................................................................................................27
1.3.4.2 Control function .......................................................................................................................28
1.3.5 Machine monitoring .................................................................................................................31
1.3.5.1 Ground fault ............................................................................................................................31
1.3.5.2 Current limits ...........................................................................................................................33
1.3.5.3 Operation monitoring ...............................................................................................................34
1.3.5.4 Voltage monitoring ..................................................................................................................36
1.3.5.5 Cos phi monitoring ..................................................................................................................37
1.3.5.6 Active power monitoring ..........................................................................................................38
1.3.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring ..........................................................................................................40
1.3.5.8 Temperature monitoring ..........................................................................................................43
1.3.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing .................................................................................43
1.3.6 Inputs ......................................................................................................................................44
1.3.6.1 Digital module inputs ...............................................................................................................44
1.3.6.2 Basic unit inputs ......................................................................................................................44
1.3.6.3 Analog module inputs ..............................................................................................................44
1.3.6.4 Temperature module inputs .....................................................................................................45
1.3.7 Outputs ...................................................................................................................................45
1.3.7.1 Basic unit outputs ....................................................................................................................45
1.3.7.2 Cyclic send data ......................................................................................................................45
1.3.7.3 Acyclic send data ....................................................................................................................46
1.3.7.4 Operator panel LED ................................................................................................................46
1.3.7.5 Digital module outputs .............................................................................................................46
1.3.7.6 Analog module - output ...........................................................................................................47
1.3.8 Standard functions ..................................................................................................................47
1.3.8.1 OPO - Positioner response ......................................................................................................47
1.3.8.2 Test/Reset ..............................................................................................................................47
1.3.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF ....................................................................................................48
1.3.8.4 External fault ...........................................................................................................................49
1.3.8.5 Emergency start ......................................................................................................................50
1.3.8.6 Safety-related tripping .............................................................................................................50

4 Programming and Operating Manual, 08/2013
Table of contents
1.3.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring) ........................................................................................... 53

1.3.8.8 Operational protection OFF .................................................................................................... 54
1.3.8.9 Power failure monitoring ......................................................................................................... 54
1.3.8.10 Time stamping........................................................................................................................ 55
1.3.9 Logic modules ........................................................................................................................ 56
1.3.9.1 Counters ................................................................................................................................ 56
1.3.9.2 Timer ..................................................................................................................................... 56
1.3.9.3 Signal conditioning ................................................................................................................. 57
1.3.9.4 Non-volatile element ............................................................................................................... 58
1.3.9.5 Flashing ................................................................................................................................. 58
1.3.9.6 Flicker .................................................................................................................................... 59
1.3.9.7 Limit monitor .......................................................................................................................... 60
1.3.9.8 Truth table 2I/1O .................................................................................................................... 61
1.3.9.9 Truth table 3I/1O .................................................................................................................... 61
1.3.9.10 Truth table 5I/2O .................................................................................................................... 62
1.3.9.11 Calculators ............................................................................................................................. 62
1.3.10 3UF50 compatibility mode ...................................................................................................... 64
1.3.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode ...................................................................................................... 64
1.3.10.2 3UF50 basic type ................................................................................................................... 64
1.3.10.3 3UF50 operating mode ........................................................................................................... 64
1.3.11 Analog value recording ........................................................................................................... 64
1.3.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge .................................................................................... 64
1.3.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger ....................................................................................... 64
1.3.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate .................................................................................. 64
1.3.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value..................................................................... 64
1.3.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input .................................................................................... 65
1.3.12 Online parameters .................................................................................................................. 65
1.3.12.1 Online - status command start pause...................................................................................... 65
1.3.12.2 Online - event short circuit ...................................................................................................... 65
1.3.12.3 Online - event open circuit ...................................................................................................... 65
1.3.12.4 Online - event InM deleted...................................................................................................... 65
1.3.12.5 Online - event InM programmed ............................................................................................. 65
1.3.12.6 Online - event InM read-in ...................................................................................................... 65
1.3.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly................................................................................... 65
1.3.12.8 Online - event InM readonly.................................................................................................... 66
1.3.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly .................................................................................................. 66
1.3.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible ............................................................. 66
1.3.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit ................................................................................. 66
1.3.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit ................................................................................. 66
1.3.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit ........................................................................................ 66
1.3.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit ........................................................................................ 66
1.3.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current ........................................................................... 66
1.3.12.16 Online - E module P last .................................................................................................... 66
1.4 Module parameters ................................................................................................................ 67
1.4.1 Identification ........................................................................................................................... 67
1.4.1.1 Marking .................................................................................................................................. 67
1.4.2 Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 67
1.4.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module ................................................................ 67
1.4.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit............................ 67
1.4.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit ............................ 68
1.4.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit ............................ 69
1.4.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor ...................................................................................................... 69

Table of contents
1.4.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed ...............................................69

1.4.3 Motor protection ......................................................................................................................70
1.4.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor ............................................................................................70
1.4.4 Motor control ...........................................................................................................................75
1.4.4.1 Control stations .......................................................................................................................75
1.4.4.2 Control function .......................................................................................................................77
1.4.5 Machine monitoring .................................................................................................................82
1.4.5.1 Ground fault ............................................................................................................................82
1.4.5.2 Current limits ...........................................................................................................................86
1.4.5.3 Operation monitoring ...............................................................................................................89
1.4.5.4 Voltage monitoring ..................................................................................................................91
1.4.5.5 Cos phi monitoring ..................................................................................................................93
1.4.5.6 Active power monitoring ..........................................................................................................95
1.4.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring ..........................................................................................................97
1.4.5.8 Temperature monitoring ........................................................................................................102
1.4.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing ...............................................................................103
1.4.6 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................104
1.4.6.1 Digital module inputs .............................................................................................................104
1.4.6.2 Basic unit inputs ....................................................................................................................104
1.4.6.3 Analog module inputs ............................................................................................................104
1.4.6.4 Temperature module inputs ...................................................................................................105
1.4.7 Outputs .................................................................................................................................106
1.4.7.1 Basic unit outputs ..................................................................................................................106
1.4.7.2 Cyclic send data ....................................................................................................................106
1.4.7.3 Acyclic send data ..................................................................................................................107
1.4.7.4 Operator panel LED ..............................................................................................................107
1.4.7.5 Digital module outputs ...........................................................................................................108
1.4.7.6 Analog module - output .........................................................................................................108
1.4.8 Standard functions ................................................................................................................109
1.4.8.1 OPO - Positioner response ....................................................................................................109
1.4.8.2 Test/Reset ............................................................................................................................109
1.4.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF ..................................................................................................111
1.4.8.4 External fault .........................................................................................................................111
1.4.8.5 Emergency start ....................................................................................................................113
1.4.8.6 Safety-related tripping ...........................................................................................................113
1.4.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) ..........................................................................................117
1.4.8.8 Operational Protection Off .....................................................................................................118
1.4.8.9 Power failure monitoring ........................................................................................................118
1.4.8.10 Time stamping ......................................................................................................................120
1.4.9 Logic modules .......................................................................................................................120
1.4.9.1 Counter .................................................................................................................................120
1.4.9.2 Timer ....................................................................................................................................121
1.4.9.3 Signal conditioning ................................................................................................................122
1.4.9.4 Non-volatile element..............................................................................................................123
1.4.9.5 Flashing ................................................................................................................................124
1.4.9.6 Flicker ...................................................................................................................................125
1.4.9.7 Limit monitor .........................................................................................................................126
1.4.9.8 Truth table 2I/1O ...................................................................................................................128
1.4.9.9 Truth table 3I/1O ...................................................................................................................129
1.4.9.10 Truth table 5I/2O ...................................................................................................................129
1.4.9.11 Calculators ............................................................................................................................130
1.4.10 3UF50 compatibility mode .....................................................................................................132

Table of contents
1.4.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode .................................................................................................... 132

1.4.10.2 3UF50 basic type ................................................................................................................. 133
1.4.10.3 3UF50 operating mode ......................................................................................................... 133
1.4.11 Analog value recording ......................................................................................................... 133
1.4.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge .................................................................................. 133
1.4.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger ..................................................................................... 133
1.4.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate ................................................................................ 133
1.4.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value................................................................... 134
1.4.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input .................................................................................. 134
1.4.12 Online parameters ................................................................................................................ 134
1.4.12.1 Online - status command start pause.................................................................................... 134
1.4.12.2 Online - event short circuit .................................................................................................... 134
1.4.12.3 Online - event open circuit .................................................................................................... 135
1.4.12.4 Online - event InM deleted.................................................................................................... 135
1.4.12.5 Online - event InM programmed ........................................................................................... 135
1.4.12.6 Online - event InM read-in .................................................................................................... 135
1.4.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly................................................................................. 135
1.4.12.8 Online - event InM readonly.................................................................................................. 136
1.4.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly ................................................................................................ 136
1.4.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible ........................................................... 136
1.4.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit ............................................................................... 136
1.4.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit ............................................................................... 136
1.4.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit ...................................................................................... 137
1.4.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit ...................................................................................... 137
1.4.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current ......................................................................... 137
1.4.12.16 Online - E module P last .................................................................................................. 137
1.5 Help texts for function blocks and connection blocks in the CFC Editor ................................. 138
1.5.1 Protection/Control................................................................................................................. 138
1.5.2 Extended protection ............................................................................................................. 138
1.5.3 Extended control .................................................................................................................. 138
1.5.4 Control stations .................................................................................................................... 138
1.5.5 Thermistor............................................................................................................................ 139
1.5.6 Analog value recording ......................................................................................................... 139
1.5.7 Ground fault ......................................................................................................................... 139
1.5.8 Current limits ........................................................................................................................ 139
1.5.9 Voltage................................................................................................................................. 140
1.5.10 Power factor (cos phi)........................................................................................................... 140
1.5.11 Active power ........................................................................................................................ 140
1.5.12 0/4-20 mA (analog module 1) ............................................................................................... 140
1.5.13 Operation monitoring ............................................................................................................ 141
1.5.14 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing .............................................................................. 141
1.5.15 Temperature (TM1) .............................................................................................................. 141
1.5.16 BU inputs ............................................................................................................................. 141
1.5.17 OP buttons ........................................................................................................................... 142
1.5.18 DM1 inputs, DM2 inputs ....................................................................................................... 142
1.5.19 TM1 inputs ........................................................................................................................... 142
1.5.20 AM1 inputs ........................................................................................................................... 142
1.5.21 Cycl. receive byte 0, cycl. receive byte 1, cycl. receive byte 2/3, cycl. receive byte 4/5 .......... 143
1.5.22 BU outputs ........................................................................................................................... 143
1.5.23 OP LED................................................................................................................................ 143
1.5.24 DM1 outputs, DM2 outputs ................................................................................................... 143
1.5.25 AM1 output........................................................................................................................... 144

Table of contents
1.5.26 Cycl. send byte 0, cycl. send byte 1, cycl. send byte 2/3, cycl. send byte 4/9, cycl. send
byte 10/19 .............................................................................................................................144
1.5.27 Test 1....................................................................................................................................144
1.5.28 Test 2....................................................................................................................................144
1.5.29 Reset 1,2,3 ...........................................................................................................................144
1.5.30 TPF.......................................................................................................................................145
1.5.31 External fault 1,2,3,4,5,6........................................................................................................145
1.5.32 OPO .....................................................................................................................................145
1.5.33 UVO ......................................................................................................................................145
1.5.34 Emergency start ....................................................................................................................146
1.5.35 Safety-related tripping ...........................................................................................................146
1.5.36 Watchdog..............................................................................................................................146
1.5.37 Time stamping ......................................................................................................................146
1.5.38 Truth table TT 1 to 9, 3I/1O ...................................................................................................146
1.5.39 Counters 1 to 4 .....................................................................................................................147
1.5.40 Timers 1 to 4 .........................................................................................................................147
1.5.41 Signal conditioning 1 to 4 ......................................................................................................147
1.5.42 Non-volatile elements 1 to 4 ..................................................................................................147
1.5.43 Flashing 1, 2, 3 .....................................................................................................................148
1.5.44 Flicker 1, 2, 3 ........................................................................................................................148
1.5.45 Limit monitors 1 to 4 ..............................................................................................................148
1.5.46 Calculator 1 to 2 ....................................................................................................................148
1.5.47 Device o.k. ............................................................................................................................149
1.5.48 Current flowing ......................................................................................................................149
1.5.49 Device test active ..................................................................................................................149
1.5.50 General fault .........................................................................................................................149
1.5.51 General warning ....................................................................................................................149
1.5.52 Remote mode .......................................................................................................................149
1.5.53 Hardware fault basic unit .......................................................................................................149
1.5.54 Module fault ..........................................................................................................................150
1.5.55 Temporary components.........................................................................................................150
1.5.56 Configuration error ................................................................................................................150
1.5.57 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................150
1.5.58 '0' ..........................................................................................................................................150
1.5.59 '1' ..........................................................................................................................................150
1.5.60 Fixed level.............................................................................................................................150
1.5.61 Configured operator panel missing ........................................................................................150
1.5.62 Phase unbalance ..................................................................................................................150
1.5.63 Voltage U_min.......................................................................................................................151
1.5.64 Power factor (cos phi) ...........................................................................................................151
1.5.65 Thermal motor model ............................................................................................................151
1.5.66 Time to trip ............................................................................................................................151
1.5.67 Remaining cooling down period .............................................................................................151
1.5.68 Last trip current (% of le) .......................................................................................................151
1.5.69 Stop time...............................................................................................................................151
1.5.70 Max. current I_max (% of Ie)..................................................................................................151
1.5.71 Current I_L1 (% of Ie), current I_L2 (% of Ie), current I_L3 (% of Ie) .......................................151
1.5.72 Number of overload trips .......................................................................................................152
1.5.73 Int. number of overload trips ..................................................................................................152
1.5.74 Number of parameterizations ................................................................................................152
1.5.75 Phase voltage UL1-N, phase voltage UL2-N, phase voltage UL3-N .......................................152
1.5.76 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word) ...........................................152

Table of contents
1.5.77 Int. motor operating hours (H word), int. motor operating hours (L word) ............................... 152
1.5.78 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word) .......................................... 152
1.5.79 Number of starts (H word), number of starts (L word)............................................................ 152
1.5.80 Int. number of starts clockwise (H word), int. number of starts clockwise (L word) ................. 152
1.5.81 Int. number of starts counterclockwise (H word), int. number of starts counterclockwise
(L word)................................................................................................................................ 153
1.5.82 Consumed energy (H word), consumed energy (L word) ...................................................... 153
1.5.83 Active power P (H word), active power P (L word) ................................................................ 153
1.5.84 Apparent power S (H word), apparent power S (L word) ....................................................... 153
1.5.85 Max. current I_max (10 mA) ................................................................................................. 153
1.5.86 Current I_L1 (10 mA), current I_L2 (10 mA), current I_L3 (10 mA)......................................... 153
1.5.87 Max. current I_max (100 mA)................................................................................................ 153
1.5.88 Current I_L1 (100 mA), current I_L2 (100 mA), current I_L3 (100 mA) ................................... 153
2 General information ................................................................................................................... 155
2.1 SIMOCODE ES - Online Help............................................................................................... 155
2.2 System manuals for SIMOCODE pro .................................................................................... 156
3 Device configuration .................................................................................................................. 157
4 Diagnostics & Online.................................................................................................................. 161
4.1 General information .............................................................................................................. 161
4.2 Diagnostics status ................................................................................................................ 163
4.3 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 164
5 Parameterization of the modules ................................................................................................. 165
5.1 Identification ......................................................................................................................... 165
5.1.1 Device .................................................................................................................................. 165
5.1.2 Marking ................................................................................................................................ 165
5.2 Libraries ............................................................................................................................... 166
5.3 Application selection ............................................................................................................. 167
5.4 Fieldbus interface ................................................................................................................. 169
5.4.1 Device parameters ............................................................................................................... 169
5.4.2 PROFIBUS address ............................................................................................................. 171
5.5 Motor protection ................................................................................................................... 173
5.5.1 Motor protection introduction ................................................................................................ 173
5.5.2 Overload protection .............................................................................................................. 174
5.5.3 Unbalance protection ........................................................................................................... 179
5.5.4 Blocking protection ............................................................................................................... 180
5.5.5 Thermistor protection ........................................................................................................... 181
5.6 Motor control ........................................................................................................................ 183
5.6.1 Control stations .................................................................................................................... 183
5.6.2 Operating modes.................................................................................................................. 185
5.6.3 Mode selector ...................................................................................................................... 186
5.6.4 Enables ................................................................................................................................ 186
5.6.5 Enables and enabled control command schematic ............................................................... 187
5.6.6 Control function .................................................................................................................... 188
5.6.7 Contactor controls ................................................................................................................ 189
5.6.8 Lamp controls and status information ................................................................................... 190

Table of contents
5.6.9 Non-maintained command mode ...........................................................................................191

5.6.10 Saving change-over command ..............................................................................................191
5.6.11 DM-F LOCAL/DM-F PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function ..............................191
5.6.12 Load type ..............................................................................................................................192
5.6.13 Feedback time ......................................................................................................................192
5.6.14 Execution time ......................................................................................................................192
5.6.15 Interlocking time ....................................................................................................................193
5.6.16 Change-over pause ...............................................................................................................193
5.6.17 Max. star time .......................................................................................................................193
5.6.18 Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable ................................193
5.6.19 Scope and application ...........................................................................................................194
5.7 Machine monitoring ...............................................................................................................195
5.7.1 Ground fault ..........................................................................................................................195
5.7.2 Internal ground-fault monitoring .............................................................................................195
5.7.3 External ground-fault monitoring ............................................................................................196
5.7.4 Current limits .........................................................................................................................198
5.7.5 Current limits I> (upper limit)..................................................................................................198
5.7.6 Current limits I< (lower limit) ..................................................................................................199
5.7.7 Voltage monitoring ................................................................................................................201
5.7.8 Cos phi monitoring ................................................................................................................203
5.7.9 Active power monitoring ........................................................................................................204
5.7.10 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring ........................................................................................................205
5.7.11 Hysteresis 0 / 4 - 20 mA ........................................................................................................207
5.7.12 Operation monitoring .............................................................................................................207
5.7.13 Operating hours monitoring ...................................................................................................209
5.7.14 Stop time monitoring .............................................................................................................209
5.7.15 Number of starts monitoring motor.........................................................................................210
5.7.16 Temperature monitoring (analog) ..........................................................................................211
5.7.17 Hysteresis for temperature ....................................................................................................213
5.7.18 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing ...............................................................................213
5.8 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................215
5.8.1 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................215
5.8.2 Basic unit inputs ....................................................................................................................215
5.8.3 Operator panel buttons..........................................................................................................216
5.8.4 Digital module inputs .............................................................................................................218
5.8.5 Temperature module inputs ...................................................................................................221
5.8.6 Analog module inputs ............................................................................................................223
5.8.7 Cyclic receive ........................................................................................................................225
5.8.8 Acyclic receive ......................................................................................................................226
5.8.9 Analog value recording ..........................................................................................................227
5.8.10 3UF50 compatibility mode .....................................................................................................229
5.9 Outputs .................................................................................................................................231
5.9.1 Basic unit ..............................................................................................................................231
5.9.2 Operator panel LED ..............................................................................................................233
5.9.3 Digital module .......................................................................................................................234
5.9.4 Analog module ......................................................................................................................236
5.9.5 Cyclic send data ....................................................................................................................238
5.9.6 Acyclic send data ..................................................................................................................240
5.10 Standard functions ................................................................................................................242
5.10.1 Test/Reset ............................................................................................................................242

Table of contents
5.10.2 Test position feedback (TPF)................................................................................................ 245

5.10.3 External fault ........................................................................................................................ 247
5.10.4 Operational protection OFF (OPO) ....................................................................................... 250
5.10.5 Power failure monitoring (UVO) ............................................................................................ 251
5.10.6 Emergency start ................................................................................................................... 253
5.10.7 Safety-related tripping .......................................................................................................... 254
5.10.8 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) ................................................................ 258
5.10.9 Time stamping...................................................................................................................... 259
5.11 Logic modules ...................................................................................................................... 262
5.11.1 Truth table 2I/1O .................................................................................................................. 262
5.11.2 Truth table 3I/1O .................................................................................................................. 262
5.11.3 Truth table 5I/2O .................................................................................................................. 264
5.11.4 Counter ................................................................................................................................ 265
5.11.5 Timer ................................................................................................................................... 267
5.11.6 Signal conditioning ............................................................................................................... 268
5.11.7 Non-volatile element ............................................................................................................. 270
5.11.8 Flashing ............................................................................................................................... 272
5.11.9 Flicker .................................................................................................................................. 273
5.11.10 Limit monitor ........................................................................................................................ 274
5.11.11 Calculators ........................................................................................................................... 276
5.11.11.1 Calculator 1 ..................................................................................................................... 276
5.11.11.2 Calculator 2 ..................................................................................................................... 279
5.12 3UF50 compatibility mode .................................................................................................... 282
5.12.1 3UF50 compatibility mode - diagram of the data ................................................................... 282
6 Commissioning ......................................................................................................................... 287
6.1 Control/status information ..................................................................................................... 287
6.2 Faults ................................................................................................................................... 288
6.3 Warnings.............................................................................................................................. 294
6.4 Messages ............................................................................................................................ 298
6.5 Measured values .................................................................................................................. 300
6.6 Service data - statistical data ................................................................................................ 302
6.7 Error buffer/error protocol ..................................................................................................... 304
6.8 Test...................................................................................................................................... 305
6.9 Command ............................................................................................................................ 306
6.10 Password ............................................................................................................................. 308
6.11 Parameter comparison ......................................................................................................... 308
6.12 Actual configuration .............................................................................................................. 309
6.13 Analog value recording ......................................................................................................... 310
7 Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE..................................................... 313
7.1 Description ........................................................................................................................... 313
7.2 Overview - Toolbar - Menu commands ................................................................................. 314
7.3 Calling the graphic editor ...................................................................................................... 314

Table of contents
7.4 Functions ..............................................................................................................................315

7.4.1 Connecting ............................................................................................................................315
7.4.2 Selecting a function block or connection block and using it in the plan ...................................316
7.4.3 Select all ...............................................................................................................................316
7.4.4 Move plan .............................................................................................................................316
7.4.5 Monitoring .............................................................................................................................317
7.4.6 Representations ....................................................................................................................317
7.4.6.1 Position blocks according to data flow ...................................................................................317
7.4.6.2 Set colors ..............................................................................................................................318
7.4.6.3 Switching the grid on and off .................................................................................................318
7.5 Functions of the toolbar .........................................................................................................319
7.5.1 Transferring the online data to the hardware..........................................................................319
7.5.2 Transferring the online data to the offline project ...................................................................319
7.5.3 Insert text field.......................................................................................................................319
7.5.4 Highlight signal flow...............................................................................................................320
7.5.5 Select view............................................................................................................................321
7.5.6 Zoom in.................................................................................................................................321
7.5.7 Show all ................................................................................................................................321
7.5.8 Adapting the selection to the size of the work area ................................................................321
7.5.9 Zoom out...............................................................................................................................322
7.5.10 Show/hide unused connections .............................................................................................322
7.5.11 Activate/deactivate monitoring ...............................................................................................322
7.5.12 Delete ...................................................................................................................................322
8 Migrating a SIMOCODE pro project.............................................................................................. 323
8.1 Migrating projects ..................................................................................................................323
8.2 Launching the migration ........................................................................................................324
9 Additional information ................................................................................................................. 325
9.1 Service..................................................................................................................................325
9.1.1 Active control stations, contactor controls and lamp controls ..................................................325
9.1.2 Diagnostics via LED display ..................................................................................................325
9.1.3 Restoring factory settings ......................................................................................................330
9.1.4 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address .......................................................................................331
9.1.5 Backing up and saving parameters ........................................................................................332
9.1.6 Configuring the diagnostics response ....................................................................................333
9.1.7 Setting the safety relay functions ...........................................................................................333
9.1.8 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components ................................................................................334
9.1.8.1 Replacing the basic unit ........................................................................................................334
9.1.8.2 Replacing the expansion module ...........................................................................................334
9.1.8.3 Replacing a DM-F .................................................................................................................335
9.1.8.4 Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module.............335
9.2 Data sets...............................................................................................................................336
9.2.1 Data set 92 - Device diagnostics ...........................................................................................336
9.2.2 Data set 94 - Measured values ..............................................................................................336
9.2.3 Data set 95 - Service and statistical data ...............................................................................336
9.3 Examples ..............................................................................................................................337
9.3.1 Examples for the conversion factor ........................................................................................337
9.3.2 Limit monitor example ...........................................................................................................338
9.3.3 Calculator examples ..............................................................................................................338
Index ........................................................................................................................................ 341

Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1
1.1 Tooltips SiriusPLAT without links
1.1.1 Device
1.1.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number

Display of order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable product
designation).
1.1.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code

Short code of the device.
1.1.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager

Name of the manufacturer.
1.1.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Profile_ID
1.1.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family

Name of the overall device family, e.g. switching devices.
1.1.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily

Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family. e.g. Motor Management System.
1.1.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class

Name of the device class subordinate to the subfamily, e.g. SIMOCODE pro C.
1.1.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No.

Vendor-internal information.

Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE
1.1.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Hardware_Revision.
1.1.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision.
1.1.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Rev_Counter.
1.1.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Version.
1.1.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Support.
1.1.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp

1.1.2 Fieldbus interface
1.1.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block

Activate the "Startup parameter block active" checkbox if you want to prevent the parameter
data that is currently stored by SIMOCODE pro being overwritten by the PROFIBUS DP
master during startup. In this case, you can only modify parameter data using the
SIMOCODE ES software.
Default setting:
● Activated: When parameterizing in SIMOCODE ES directly
● deactivated: In accordance with factory setting or when integrated via SIMOCODE pro.
1.1.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address

Selection of the PROFIBUS DP address.
A node's address must be unique within a PROFIBUS DP network. Select a unique DP
address here.
Address 126 is generally assigned to a factory-set device.

1.1.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address

Displays the set PROFIsafe address.
Notice
At this point, only the PROFIsafe address set on the module is displayed. You must set the
PROFIsafe address direct via the DIP switch of the PROFIsafe digital module!
1.1.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed

No setting possible.
The device detects the transmission speed (baud rate on PROFIBUS DP) automatically.
Baud rates of up to 12 Mbit/s are possible.
1.1.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type

Select the basic type (1 or 2).
The basic type selected determines the structure and length of the cyclic data exchanged
between the PROFIBUS DP master and the PROFIBUS DP slave. You will find basic type
selection tables in the SIMOCODE pro System Manual, in the section titled "Telegram
description and data access".
1.1.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages

Activated: Event messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.
Deactivated: Event messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.
1.1.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings

Activated: Warning messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.
Deactivated: Warning messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.
1.1.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults

Activated: Trip messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.
Deactivated: Trip messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.
1.1.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults

Activated: Device faults are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of a diagnostic alarm.
Deactivated: Device faults are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.

1.2 Tooltips SiriusPLAT
1.2.1 Device
1.2.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number

Display of order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable product
designation).
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code

Short code of the device.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager

Name of the manufacturer.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Profile_ID
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family

Name of the overall device family, e.g. switching devices.
See also
Device (Page 165)

1.2.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily

Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family. e.g. Motor Management System.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class

Name of the device class subordinate to the subfamily, e.g. SIMOCODE pro C.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No.

See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Hardware_Revision.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Rev_Counter.
See also
Device (Page 165)

1.2.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Version.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data

Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Support.
See also
Device (Page 165)
1.2.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp

See also
Device (Page 165)
Time stamping (Page 259)
1.2.2 Fieldbus interface
1.2.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block

Activate the "Startup parameter block active" checkbox if you want to prevent the parameter
data that is currently stored by SIMOCODE pro being overwritten by the PROFIBUS DP
master during startup. In this case, you can only modify parameter data using the
SIMOCODE ES software.
Default setting:
● Activated: When parameterizing in SIMOCODE ES directly
● deactivated: In accordance with factory setting or when integrated via SIMOCODE pro.
See also
Fieldbus interface (Page 169)

1.2.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address

Selection of the PROFIBUS DP address.
A node's address must be unique within a PROFIBUS DP network. Select a unique
DP address here.
Address 126 is generally assigned to a factory-set device.
See also
1.2.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address

Displays the set PROFIsafe address.
Notice
At this point, only the PROFIsafe address set on the module is displayed. You must set the
PROFIsafe address direct via the DIP switch of the PROFIsafe digital module!
See also
1.2.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed

No setting possible.
The device detects the transmission speed (baud rate on PROFIBUS DP) automatically.
Baud rates of up to 12 Mbit/s are possible.
See also
1.2.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type

Select the basic type (1 or 2).
The basic type selected determines the structure and length of the cyclic data exchanged
between the PROFIBUS DP master and the PROFIBUS DP slave. You will find basic type
selection tables in the SIMOCODE pro System Manual, in the section titled "Telegram
description and data access".
See also

1.2.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages

Activated: Event messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.
Deactivated: Event messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.
See also
1.2.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings

Activated: Warning messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.
Deactivated: Warning messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.
See also
1.2.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults

Activated: Trip messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.
Deactivated: Trip messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.
See also
1.2.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults

Activated: Device faults are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of a diagnostic alarm.
Deactivated: Device faults are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.
See also

1.3 Module parameters without links
1.3.1 Identification
1.3.1.1 Marking
Module parameter - Identification - Designation

Entry of any text, e.g. for plant documentation.
1.3.2 Configuration
1.3.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module

Selection of an initialization module.
The initialization module allows all system parameter settings to be backed up and
transferred to a new system (in the case of device replacement, for example) without the
need for additional resources or detailed specialist expertise.
Note
The SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units from product version *E09* and
higher do not support the initialization module.
1.3.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro C
basic unit:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter
● Reversing starter
● Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
1.3.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter

● Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

● Star-delta starter
● Star-delta reversing starter
● Dahlander
● Dahlander reversing starter
● Pole-changing starter
● Pole-changing reversing starter
● Valve
● Positioner 1
● Positioner 2
● Positioner 3
● Positioner 4
● Positioner 5
● Soft starter with reversing contactor
● Soft starter.
1.3.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro S
basic unit:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter
● Soft starter
1.3.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor

Activate the "Thermistor" checkbox if you want to use the thermistor (binary PTC) to monitor
motor temperature. When the checkbox is activated, the "Thermistor" motor protection dialog
appears. Here you can define the response when the trip level is reached and the response
in the event of a sensor fault.

1.3.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed

If "Yes" is set in the dropdown menu, the message "Removal error" will be output if a
configured operator panel without display is removed.
If "No" is set, the message "Removal error" will not be displayed if the operator panel is
removed during operation. Use this setting if an operator panel is connected temporarily.
Notice
If the operator panel is the motor's only active control station, the motor might not shut down
again!
1.3.3 Motor protection
1.3.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor
Motor protection - Voltage measurement - Load type

Here you select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load (default
setting: 3-phase). For a "1-phase" type of load, proceed as follows:
● Deactivate the internal ground-fault detection and unbalance protection
● Route just one of the two conductors through any feed-through opening on the current
measuring module.
Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Overload protection - Type of load

setting).
For a "1-phase" type of load, proceed as follows:
● If necessary, deactivate internal ground-fault detection.
measuring module. Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Overload protection - Reset

Manual (default setting): Faults must be acknowledged by a reset signal:
● Via the "Reset" button on the basic unit or
● Via the "Reset" button on the operator panel or
● Via "Standard functions -> Reset" (the "Reset - Input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to
the corresponding sockets, e.g. using a reset via the bus).

Motor protection - Thermistor - Response when trip level reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the thermistor trip level is exceeded
(default setting: tripping).
Motor protection - Thermistor - Response to sensor fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a short circuit or if an
open circuit occurs in the thermistor cable (default setting: warning).
Motor protection - Blocking protection - Delay

Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling,
warning, tripping). This setting can be modified during operation.
Overload protection - Cooling down period

Time setting (60 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 300 s), after which an overload trip can be
reset. This setting can be modified during operation.
Overload protection - Pause time

Time setting (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 0 s) for the cooling down response of the motor
when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). This
setting can be modified during operation. After this time the "thermal motor model" will be
deleted and a new cold start will be possible. This means that many startups can be
performed in a short space of time.
Motor protection - Response when trip level reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is exceeded in the
event of an overload (default setting: tripping).
Motor protection - Overload protection - Response when prewarning threshold reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the prewarning level (I> 115 % Is) is
exceeded in the event of an overload (default setting: warning).
Motor protection - Overload protection - Response to unbalance

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a phase unbalance (default
setting: warning).

Overload protection - Class

The Class (tripping class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip
from cold at 7.2 times the setting current (motor protection to IEC 60947). You can choose
between 8 different settings (Class 5 to Class 40). Please note that with startups > Class 10,
the permissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced (derated), i.e. you must
select a larger contactor. The tripping class can be modified during operation.
Motor protection - Delay in the event of overload operation (delay prewarning)

Define how long (default setting: 0.5 s) the prewarning level (1.15 x Is) must be constantly
exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made,
there will be no response. In the event of a loss of phase or an unbalance > 50%, the
prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately 0.85 x Is. You can change this
setting during operation.
Motor protection - Unbalance protection threshold

Setting of the unbalance protection level (0 to 100%, default setting: 40%), which must be
exceeded for SIMOCODE pro to respond. Loss of one phase corresponds to an unbalance
of 100%. This setting can be modified during operation.
Overload protection - Blocking protection threshold

Setting of a blocking threshold for the motor current (0 to 1020% of the set current Is in 4%
increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will react as per the selected
response. The response is triggered as soon as the motor current exceeds this threshold.
This setting can be modified during operation.
Overload protection - Set current Is1

Setting of the motor rated current. This value can be found on the rating plate of the motor.
The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value. The setting range depends
on the current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module selected. This setting
can be modified during operation.
Overload protection - Is1-Is2 transformation ratio active

Activate this checkbox if you are using an interposing transformer or looping the main current
lines through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module several
times. If the checkbox is activated, you can enter a transformation ratio.
Overload protection - Is1 transformation ratio - Numerator

Enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer (primary) here, with the "Is1
transformation ratio - Active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default: 0).

Overload protection - Is1 transformation ratio - Denominator

Enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer (secondary) here, with the "Is1
transformation ratio - Active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 to 15 (default: 0).



Set current Is2 can only be set for control functions with two speeds (Dahlander, Dahlander
reversing starter, pole-changing starter, pole-changing reversing starter) as a way of
ensuring that appropriate overload protection is also provided for the higher of the two
speeds.
Is2 is usually set to a value higher than Is1.
The setting range depends on the selected current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module.
Motor protection - Overload protection - Delay in the event of unbalance

warning, tripping).
Motor protection - Blocking protection - Response when blocking threshold reached

Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the blocking threshold is
exceeded (default setting: deactivated).

1.3.4 Motor control
1.3.4.1 Control stations
Control stations - Operation mode switch S1, S2

You can use the operation mode switch to change over between the following operating
modes using any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.):
● Local 1
● Local 2
● Local 3
● Remote/Automatic
Input S1: Local 1 (0), Local 2 (0), Local 3 (1), Remote/Auto (1)
Control stations - Activate enables

Enables, which must be activated, are assigned to the "ON" and "OFF" control commands
for each control station in every operating mode. Activate the enables for the "ON" and
"OFF" control commands ("ON" only, "OFF" only, or "ON" and "OFF") for each control
station, depending on whether the control station is to be able to only switch the motor on,
only switch it off, or switch it on and off.
Control station - PLC/PCS

Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Cyclic receive" function blocks).
Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on any PC which, along
with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP.
The control commands are received from the PROFIBUS DPV1 via the acyclic control
telegram.
No connection needs to be established if the SIMOCODE ES Professional or SIMATIC PDM
PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP. In this case, the control
commands will be implemented automatically via the PC control station [DPV1].
Control station - Operator panel

Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Operator panel buttons" function block).
Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button
must be used as a speed change-over button for control functions with two speeds and two
directions of rotation. For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/<<>>".

If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a PC is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system

interface, its control commands are implemented automatically via the "Operator panel (OP)"
control station and must be enabled here as applicable.
Control station - Local control

Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "BU inputs" and "DM1 inputs" or "DM2 inputs"
function blocks).
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the motor
down if an open circuit occurs in the incoming cable, for example. The precondition is that
the control station is active.
1.3.4.2 Control function
Control function - Auxiliary control input FC

The "Auxiliary control input FC" function block is an expanded status message for the
"Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.
PC (Feedback Close) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to
which the limit switch is wired.
Control function - Auxiliary control input FO

The "Auxiliary control input FO" function block is an expanded status message for the
PO (Feedback Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to
Control function - Auxiliary control input TC

The "Auxiliary control input TC" function block is an expanded status message for the
TC (Torque Closed) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to
which the torque switch is wired.
Control function - Auxiliary control input TO

The "Auxiliary control input TO" function block is an expanded status message for the
TO (Torque Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to

Control function - Control commands

Plugs of the "Control stations" function block. Connect these plugs to any sockets (e.g.
binary inputs on the basic unit, PROFIBUS DP control bits) so that the control commands
can be implemented. Each control station can output up to five different control commands
(via the plugs ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>).
The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct-on-line
starter, for example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.
Control function - Auxiliary control input Feedback ON

SIMOCODE pro monitors statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control channel, which
is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current measuring
modules. Select any socket (usually the preset socket, "Status - Current flowing").
Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Max. time for star mode
Setting of the maximum time for star mode when switching over from star to delta if the
current-dependent reversing point could not be detected (0 to 255 s, default setting: 20 s).
Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Integrated current measuring
module
● Select "Incoming cable" if the current measuring module is integrated in the motor supply
cable.
● Select "In delta" if the current measuring module is integrated in the star-delta circuit's
delta. The set current Is is reduced to Irated x √3.
Control function - Type of load

Select either "motor" (default setting) or "resistive load" (e.g. heating). If "Motor" is selected,
following an ON command "Status - Start active" will be set for the duration of the "Class"
that has been set. All current-dependent monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits,
cos phi, active power) only become active once the set "Class" time has elapsed. If
"Resistive load" is selected, "Status - Start active" will not be set. All current-dependent
monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits, cos phi, active power) become active
immediately after the start.
Control function - Save switching command

● Deactivated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other
are only implemented if "OFF" has previously been set and once the interlocking
time/change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is the default and the one which is
normally used.
● Activated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other are
implemented without a previous "OFF", once the interlocking time/change-over pause has
elapsed.

Control function - DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function

● Deactivated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules is also effected by the
SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. Select this
setting for applications where the safety-related disconnection directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
● Activated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. Select this setting for applications where the safety-
related disconnection is not in any way linked to the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Control function - Jog mode

● Deactivated (default setting): Normal mode: In this operating mode, a control command
(ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) is saved (corresponds to contactor locking).
● Activated: If you want to switch a motor on and off, either just the one time or on a
repeated temporary basis, activate the "Jog mode" checkbox. In this operating mode, a
control command (ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) only remains active as long as a "high
signal" is present at the corresponding plugs.
Control function - Change-over pause

● Control functions "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter": The change-over from the fast
speed to the slow speed can be delayed by the time set for the change-over pause
(0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0).
● Control function "star/delta": The time that elapses between switching off the star
contactor and switching on the delta contactor is extended by the time set for the change-
over pause (0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0). This setting can be modified during
operation.
Control function - Execution time

Selection of the execution time (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 1.0 s) for monitoring the start
and shutdown cycle. The start and shutdown cycle must be completed within the set time,
otherwise a fault message will be output. Following an "ON" control command, SIMOCODE
pro must measure the current in the main circuit within the execution time, otherwise the
"Fault - Execution ON command" error message will be output. Following an "OFF" control
command, SIMOCODE pro must not measure any current in the main circuit once the
execution time has elapsed, otherwise the "Fault - Execution OFF command" error message
will be output. This setting can be modified during operation.
Control function - Interlocking time

Setting an interlocking time (0 to 255 s, default 0 s) for the line contactors in the case of the
control functions with reversing function and pole-changing function.
With the interlocking time, the change-over of the direction of rotation or the change-over of
the speed from fast to slow can be time-delayed.

Control function - Check-back time

Setting of a feedback time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for monitoring the status of the
feeder (ON or OFF). If the status is "ON", the current flow may be interrupted for the duration
of the feedback time, which will then be followed by "Fault - Feedback ON". If the status is
"OFF", current may flow for the duration of the feedback time, which will then be followed by
"Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF". This setting can be modified during operation.
1.3.5 Machine monitoring
1.3.5.1 Ground fault
EMplus - Response to sensor fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a sensor fault (default
setting: deactivated).
EMplus - Monitoring - Warning

Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is
running or not (operating state "ON").
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the warning level is to take effect:
● always (on) (default setting): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor
is running or at a standstill
● if motor is running, except TPF (run): warning level only active if motor is running
● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): warning level only active
if motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.
EMplus - Monitoring
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level is to take effect:
● always (on) (default setting): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is
running or at a standstill
● if motor is running, except TPF (run): trip level only active if motor is running
● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): trip level only active if
motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.
EMplus - Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current (0 to 15% of the threshold value
in 1% increments, default setting: 5 %)

EMplus - Delay - Warning

warning). Can be modified during operation.
EMplus - Trip level

Setting a trip level for the ground-fault current (30 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments, default:
1000 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the trip level, the ground-fault current monitor
responds. This setting can be modified during operation.
EMplus - Warning level

Setting a warning level for the ground-fault current (20 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments,
default: 500 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the warning level, the ground-fault
current monitor responds. This setting can be modified during operation.
EMplus - Response to warning of an external ground fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level for the ground-
fault current is undershot (default setting: deactivated).
EMplus - Response to an external ground fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level for the ground-fault
current is undershot (default setting: signaling)
EMplus - Delay - Trip/warning level

Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping).
Setting range for the delay time if the trip level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting:
0.5 s) 1)
Setting range for the delay time if the warning level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting:
0.1 s) 1)
The delay time can be modified during operation.
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay
External ground-fault monitoring - Delay

Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s), which is an additional delay to
that for the summation current transformer, for the set response (signaling, warning,
tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.
Internal ground-fault monitoring - Response

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an internal ground fault (default

External ground-fault monitoring - Response

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external ground fault (default
setting: signaling).
Internal ground-fault monitoring - Delay

warning, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.
1.3.5.2 Current limits
Monitoring current limits - Trip level I> (high limit)

Setting of a trip level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the
motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases exceeds this
level. This setting can be modified during operation.
Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I> reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I> is exceeded (default
Monitoring current limits - Warning level I> (high limit)

Setting of a warning level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an
alarm. The message or alarm is generated as soon as the current of one or more phases
exceeds this level. This setting can be modified during operation.
Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I> reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I> is exceeded
(default setting: deactivated).
Monitoring current limits - Trip level I< (low limit)

Setting of a trip level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases undershoots
this level. This setting can be modified during operation.
Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I< not reached
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I< is undershot

Monitoring current limits - Warning level I< (low limit)

Setting of a warning level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
alarm. The message or alarm is tripped as soon as the current undershoots one or more
phases of this level. This setting can be modified during operation.
Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I< not reached
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I< is undershot
Monitoring current limits - Trip I> delay (high limit)

Monitoring current limits - Warning I> delay (high limit)

warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.
Monitoring current limits - Trip < delay (low limit)

Monitoring current limits - Warning I< delay (low limit)

Monitoring current limits - Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for current limits (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1%
increments, default setting: 5%).
1.3.5.3 Operation monitoring
Operating hours monitoring - Threshold

Setting of the response threshold (0 to 1,193,046 hours, default setting: 0) for monitoring a
motor's operating hours (service life). This setting can be modified during operation.
Monitoring of operating hours - Response to overshoot

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set threshold (0 to 1,193,046 h)
is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).

Stop time monitoring - Response to overshoot

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set motor stop time (0 to 65535
h) is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).
Stop time monitoring - level

Setting of the threshold, i.e. the length of the permissible motor stop time (0 to 65535 hours,
default setting: 0). If the permissible motor stop time is exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts as
per the response which has been selected. The threshold setting can be modified during
operation.
Monitoring the number of starts - Interlocking time

Setting of an interlocking time (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00). If a
new start command is issued within the start period after the last permitted start, it will not be
executed if "Response to overshoot - Tripping" is set. The "Fault - No. of starts >" fault
message is displayed and the set interlocking time is activated. This setting can be modified
during operation.
Monitoring the number of starts - Start period

Setting of a start period (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00) for the
permissible startup procedures. Once the parameterized start period has elapsed, the
maximum number of starts is available once more. This setting can be modified during
operation.
Monitoring the number of starts - Permissible starts

Entry of the maximum number of permissible starts (1 to 255, default setting: 1). The set
"start period" starts to elapse when the first start is executed. The setting of the maximum
number of permissible starts can be modified during operation.
Monitoring the number of starts - Response to prewarning

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond following the penultimate start
Monitoring the number of starts - Response to overshoot

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the number of starts is exceeded
during the start period (default setting: deactivated).

1.3.5.4 Voltage monitoring
Voltage monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the voltage of one or more phases
has undershot the trip level U< (default setting: deactivated).
Voltage monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit)
has undershot the warning level U< (default setting: deactivated).
Voltage monitoring - Trip level (low limit)

Setting of a trip level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments, default: 0), at
which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor.
The response is triggered as soon as the voltage of one or more phases undershoots this
level.
Voltage monitoring - Warning level (low limit)

Setting of a warning level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8-V increments, default: 0),
at which SIMOCODE pro will trip the motor.
level.
Voltage monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit)

tripping).
Can be modified during operation.
Voltage monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit)

warning).

Voltage monitoring - Activity of trip level

Definition of the motor operating states in which the trip level is to be active:
● always (on) 1): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill
● always, except in the case of TPF (on+) (default): trip level always active, regardless of
whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", that is, motor feeder is in
test position
● if motor is running, except TPF (run): trip level only active if the motor is ON and not in the
test position
1) When using basic unit 2 (product version *E03* and higher) with a current/voltage
measuring module.
Voltage monitoring - Activity of warning level

Definition of the motor operating states in which the warning level is to be active:
● always (on) 1): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill
● always, except in the case of RMT (on+) (default): warning level always active, regardless
of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in
test position
● if motor is running, except TPF (run): warning level only active if the motor is ON and not
in the test position
measuring module
Voltage monitoring - Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the hysteresis for the voltage, cos phi and power (0 to 15% of the threshold
value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).
1.3.5.5 Cos phi monitoring
Cos phi monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the trip
level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).
Cos phi monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the
warning level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).

Cos phi monitoring - Trip level cos phi< (lower limit)

Setting of a trip level cos phi< (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1% increments,
default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor.
Cos phi monitoring - Warning level cos phi< (lower limit)

Setting of a warning level cos phi < (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1%
increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a
warning.
Cos phi monitoring - Trip level delay (lower limit)

tripping).
Cos phi monitoring - Warning level delay (lower limit)

warning).
1.3.5.6 Active power monitoring
Active power monitoring - Response when trip level reached (high limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has exceeded the
trip level P> (default setting: deactivated).
Active power monitoring - Response when warning level reached (high limit)
warning level P> (default setting: deactivated).
Active power monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has undershot the
trip level P< (default setting: deactivated).
Active power monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit)
warning level P< (default setting: deactivated).

Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (high limit)

tripping).
Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (high limit)

warning).
Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit)

tripping).
Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit)

warning).
Active power monitoring - Trip level P> (high limit)

Setting of a trip level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default
setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor.
Active power monitoring - Warning level P> (high limit)

Setting of a warning level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default
setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a warning.
Active power monitoring - Trip level P< (low limit)

Setting of a trip level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default
Active power monitoring - Warning level P< (low limit)

Setting of a warning level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default

1.3.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Trip level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): trip level is always active regardless of whether the motor is
running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test
position
test position
● if motor is running, except TPF, with startup override (run+): trip level only active if the
motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no test position (TPF) is
detected.
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Warning level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): warning level is always active regardless of whether the motor
is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test
position
● if motor is running, except TPF, with startup override (run+): warning level only active if
the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no test position
(TPF) is detected.
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Trip level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is
running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position
test position
detected.

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Warning level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is
(TPF) is detected.
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (upper limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4-20 mA has
overshot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (upper limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4 - 20 mA has
overshot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit)

undershot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit)

undershot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (upper limit)

Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor.
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (upper limit)

Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. This
setting can be modified during operation.

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (lower limit)

Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (lower limit)

Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (high limit)

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (high limit)

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (low limit)

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (low limit)

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA (high limit) - Marking

The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the "Faults/Warnings"
online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA >";
range: maximum 10 characters.
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA analog signal (0 to 15% of the threshold
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (low limit) - Marking

online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA<";

1.3.5.8 Temperature monitoring
Temperature monitoring - Response when trip level T> reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the temperature has exceeded the
trip level T> (default setting: tripping).
Temperature monitoring - Response when warning level T> reached

warning level T> (default setting: warning).
Temperature monitoring - Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for the temperature (0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments, default
setting: 5 °C).
Temperature monitoring - Trip level T>

Setting of a trip level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to 65,262
°C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or shut the motor down.
Temperature monitoring - Warning level T>

Setting of a warning level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to
65,262 °C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm.
Temperature monitoring - Trip level marking - Warning level

Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>"; range: maximum
10 characters.
1.3.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Monitoring interval to mandatory testing - response

You can define here the behavior when the set limit is reached (default: deactivated).
Monitoring - Interval to mandatory testing - Test interval

Adjustable limit for the interval for mandatory testing: Range: 0 to 255 weeks (default: 0).

1.3.6 Inputs
1.3.6.1 Digital module inputs
Digital module inputs - Delay

If required, you can set a delay for the inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16 ms) in
order to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly identified as signals, for example. These
values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. The values are approximately
40 ms higher for digital modules with input supplies of 110 to 240 V AC/DC.
Notice
Delay times for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable"
or "bistable" is set for digital module 1.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the delay time cannot be set.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delay times are set using the DIP switch of the DM-
F Local on the front.
1.3.6.2 Basic unit inputs
Basic unit inputs - Delays

If required, you can set a delay for the basic unit inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16
ms) to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly detected as signals, for example.
1.3.6.3 Analog module inputs
Analog module inputs - Active inputs

Select whether only 1 analog module input or 2 analog module inputs are to be activated.
Analog module inputs - Response to open circuit

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an open circuit (default setting:
warning).
Analog module inputs - Input signal measuring range

Selection of the range of values (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA, default setting: 0 to 20 mA) of the
analog module input signal.

1.3.6.4 Temperature module inputs
Temperature module inputs - Response to sensor fault/out of range

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a fault in the sensor measuring
circuits (default setting: warning).
Temperature module inputs - Number of active sensors

Setting of the number of active sensors (1, 2, or 3; default setting: 3).
Temperature module inputs - Sensor type

Selection of the sensor type (PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC, default setting: PT100).
1.3.7 Outputs
1.3.7.1 Basic unit outputs
BU output
The "BU output" function block can be activated by any signal (e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP control bits, QE contactor control).
1.3.7.2 Cyclic send data
Cyclic send - Byte 0, byte 1

Different types of send data can be cyclically transmitted to the automation system via
PROFIBUS DP.
For this purpose, select any digital signal (fixed level 0 or 1, function block input or output,
event or fault signal).
Cyclic send - Byte 2/3

PROFIBUS DP.
To activate a word, select any analog value (any socket, e.g. maximum current Imax,
remaining cooling down period, timer actual value, etc.).

Cyclic send - Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9

PROFIBUS DP.
To activate four words, select any analog value.
1.3.7.3 Acyclic send data
Acyclic send
Different types of send data can be transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP
at irregular intervals (acyclically).
1.3.7.4 Operator panel LED
OP LED green
Green 1 to Green 4:
The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. feedback,
motor operating state).
OP LED yellow
Yellow 1 to yellow 3:
The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. status
displays, events, faults).
1.3.7.5 Digital module outputs
DM - Output
The "DM1 output" and "DM2 output" function blocks can be activated by any signal (any
sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.), usually the QE contactor
controls.

1.3.7.6 Analog module - output
Analog module output - Start-value range

Selection of the range of values (0 to 65,535, default setting: 0) for the start value of the
analog module output signal. If the output is to be used as the current source for an analog
output circuit, this value (and the end-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can be
modified during operation.
Analog module output - End-value range

Selection of the range of values (0 to 65535, default setting: 27648) for the end value of the
output circuit, this value (and the start-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can
be modified during operation.
Analog module - Output

The analog module allows you to expand basic unit 2 by one analog output. The
corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro
to be output as a 0/4-20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. If the
function block is activated via the "Assigned analog output value" plug using any integer
value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be
sent to the output terminals of the analog module.
Analog module output - Assigned analog output value

Set any value available in SIMOCODE pro (1 word/2 bytes).
1.3.8 Standard functions
1.3.8.1 OPO - Positioner response

Specification of the positioner response (only for "Positioner" control functions) if an input
signal is pending:
● "CLOSED": Positioner runs in "CLOSED" direction
● "OPEN": Positioner runs in "OPEN" direction.
1.3.8.2 Test/Reset
Standard functions - Test/Reset buttons blocked

Activate the "Test/Reset buttons blocked" checkbox if you want to block the Test/Reset
buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel for fault acknowledgment/device tests so
that you can then assign other functions to them instead.

Test 1
Select any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits for test 1 (with
check/shutdown of the output relays) or test 2 (without shutdown of the output relays, usually
for a test via a bus).
Test 2
Reset 1
The "Reset" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit or the operator panel is generally
dependent upon the operating state of the device.
Reset 2
Reset 3
1.3.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF
Test position feedback (TPF) - Type (level of controlled run-down to cold condition)
In the context of the "Cold restart" function test (testing the motor feeder with no current in
the main circuit), activate the "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the
"Test position feedback" function block to "1-active" (default setting), or the "NC contact"
option if you want to set the same input logic to "0-active".
Test position feedback - Input

Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device input).

1.3.8.4 External fault
External fault 1-6 - Response

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external fault (devices, states)
(default setting: signaling).
External fault 1-6 - Reset also using

Specification of further (common) acknowledgment options using additional reset types:
● Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the operator
panel with display, via the menu (panel reset) (set by default)
● Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1 to 3, DPV1, "Reset" command (default)
● Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the
activation signal)
● Off command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault
External fault - Input

The "External fault" function block can be used to monitor any statuses or external devices
and to generate fault messages or trip the motor, if required. The block is addressed by the
signal to be monitored: Select any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits.
External fault - Reset input

A specific reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset,
Test/Reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated.
Acknowledge the "External fault" fault via any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP control bits).
External fault - Marking

Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Speed>"; range: maximum 10 characters.
External fault 1-6 - Activity

Select the "Always" option if a fault evaluation is always to be performed, regardless of
whether the motor is running or at a standstill.
Select the "Only if motor is running" option if a fault evaluation is only to be performed if the
motor is ON.

External fault 1-6 - Type

Activate
● The "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "External fault" function
block to "1-active" (default setting)
● The "NC contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "Test position feedback"
function block to "0-active".
1.3.8.5 Emergency start
Standard functions - Emergency start - Input

The "Emergency start" function block can be addressed by any signal (any sockets, e.g.
device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.) and is edge-active. "Emergency start"
deletes the SIMOCODE pro thermal memory each time it is activated.
1.3.8.6 Safety-related tripping
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Response

Here you can adjust the response of SIMOCODE pro in the case of a safety-related tripping
by the DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe (default: deactivated).
Notes:
1. In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL / Separate PROFIsafe function from control
function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode",
only "Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" can be set and not "Tripping".
2. The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-
related disconnection are met, the enable circuits are always disabled!
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Reset

Here you can specify whether a SIMOCODE pro fault caused by the safety-related
disconnection is to be acknowledged manually or automatically (default: Manual).

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Without / with cross-circuit detection
With/without cross-circuit detection:

Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. You must connect the sensors
between T1 – Y12, Y33 and T2 – Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the T1 terminal test
signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the T2 terminal test signal at the terminals Y22 and
Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33 or Y22 and
Y34 does not agree with the test signals T1 or T2.
Deactivate cross-circuit detection if electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser scanners
are connected. In this case, the DM-F LOCAL no longer monitors the sensor inputs for
cross-circuits. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are already monitored for
cross-circuits in the sensor itself. If "without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the
test outputs T1 and T2 are deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the inputs Y12
and Y22 as well as Y33 and Y34, the DM-F Local expects a 24 V DC signal from the same
current source as the one from which the device receives its power supply (possible only in
the case of DM-F Local*1AB00) or from T3 (static 24 V DC).
In the case of the DM-F Local-*1AU00 variant, you must connect the terminal T3 to the
floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation of the input circuit and sensor supply.
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation
1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation

In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors
with opposite types of contacts (NC/NO), as are frequently used in the case of
electromagnetic switches, can also be evaluated. Make sure that the normally closed contact
is connected to Y12, and the normally open contact to Y22.
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 2 x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel
2 x 1-channel / 1 x 2-channel:
● 2 sensors with one contact each (2 x 1-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both
sensors are AND-connected. Simultaneity is not monitored.
● 1 sensor with two contacts each (1 x 2-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both
contacts are opened simultaneously.

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms
Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms

● Delay 50 ms: Switch position changes of strongly bouncing contacts are suppressed (e.g.
position switches on heavy protective doors).
● Delay 10 ms: The shorter delay permits faster deactivation of bounce-free sensors (e.g.
light arrays).
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start sensor input
Autostart / monitored start sensor input

● Autostart: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-
on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs. The start button
connection terminal Y33 is not queried.
● Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the
switch-on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs, and the start
button at the Y33 terminal is actuated (start at falling edge).
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start cascading input
Autostart / monitored start cascading input

on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC signal is
present (e.g. from T3).
switch-on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC
signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the START button at the Y33 terminal is actuated
(start at falling edge).
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With / without startup testing
With / without startup testing

After a power failure, startup testing requires that the system operator actuates the sensors
at Y12 and Y22 once.

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With autom. startup / without autom. startup after power
failure
With automatic startup / without automatic startup after power failure:

The parameters of the DM-F Local can be defined so that the enabling circuits switch
automatically to the active position again after a power failure, i.e. without actuation of the
start button Y33.
Requirements:
● Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start".
● The switch-on condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input is satisfied.
● The START button was actuated before the power failure and this was valid, i.e. the
enabling circuits were in the active position.
1.3.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring)
Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus/PLC fault - Reset

Select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually.
Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus monitoring

● Activated: If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message is generated and must be
acknowledged.
● Deactivated: No fault message.
Standard functions - Watchdog - PLC/PCS monitoring

● Activated: If a PLC fault occurs, the "PLC/PCS fault" fault message is generated and
must be acknowledged.
Watchdog PLC/PCS monitoring - Input

The "Watchdog" function block can be activated by a signal that is to be monitored (e.g.
If PLC/PCS monitoring is activated, a "Fault - PLC/PCS" fault message is generated and
must be acknowledged. If it is deactivated, no fault message is generated.

1.3.8.8 Operational protection OFF
Operational protection off - Input

Operational protection off - Type

Specification of the input logic of the "Operational protection off" function block: Normally
open contact = 1 active (default setting), normally closed contact = 0 active.
1.3.8.9 Power failure monitoring
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Addressing external power failure monitoring

Select any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits).
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Type

Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:
● Deactivated
● No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is
maintained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate
voltage relay.
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Power failure time
Power failure time

Time that starts when the power fails.
● If the line voltage is restored within the power failure time, all drives which were running
prior to the power failure are reconnected automatically.
● If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain
disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line
voltage has been restored, this fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset".
Range:
0 to 25.5 s, in increments of 0.1 s
26 to 255 s, in increments of 1 s
256 to 2550 s, in increments of 10 s.

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Restart time delay

Setting of a restart time delay (0 to 255 s, default setting: 0) to enable staggered motor
startup following power restoration, thus preventing the line voltage from dropping.
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Fault

The "Power failure monitoring" function block is activated by the signal to be monitored (any
socket, e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
The following setting options are available:
1. All contactors (QE) are disconnected immediately after the monitoring relay has been
operated/the input has been activated (UVO).
2. If the voltage is restored within the "power failure time", the motor will be reset to its
previous state. This can either be done immediately or with a time delay (restart time
delay).
3. If the "power failure time" elapses without the voltage being restored, the device enters
the fault state (undervoltage-off fault).
1.3.8.10 Time stamping
Time stamping active

SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision
(10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signal will be recorded.
Possible fields of application:
● Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system
● Analysis of system-wide interrelationships
● Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes
Activate the "Time stamping active" checkbox if you want to use this function.
Time stamping - Input

Select any signal (socket).

1.3.9 Logic modules
1.3.9.1 Counters
Counter - Input +, input -, reset

Counters are activated via the plugs "+" or "-". The counter output switches to "1" when the
preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with "Reset". The current actual value is also
available for internal processing and to the automation system.
The counter consists of:
● Three plugs (input +, input – and reset)
● One logic component
● One socket
● One "Actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between 0 and the
limit. The value is retained even in the event of a power failure.
Select any socket (e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bit).
Counter - Limit
Value (0 to 65535, default: 0) that can be reached when counting and at which the counter
issues an output signal. This value can be modified during operation.
1.3.9.2 Timer
Timer - Type
Select one of the following as the type for the timer output signal:
● With closing delay
● With closing delay with memory
● With off delay
● With fleeting closing
Timer - Limit
Time (0 to 6,553.5 s, default setting: 0) at which the timer issues an output signal during
addressing, depending on the timer type (output response). This value can be modified
during operation.

Timer - Input - Reset

The timer consists of
● Two plugs (input and reset)
● One socket
● One "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The current actual value (reset = 0) is available as a socket for further internal processing
and can also be transmitted to the automation system. If an input signal is pending, the timer
issues an output signal according to the chosen timer type:
● Closing delay (with and without memory)
● Opening delay
With fleeting closing
1.3.9.3 Signal conditioning
Signal conditioning - Type

Select one of the following as the type for the signal conditioning output signal:
● Level not inverted (default setting)
● Level inverted
● Edge rising with memory
● Edge falling with memory
Signal conditioning- Input and reset

If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the
selected signal conditioning type:
● Non-inverting
● Inverting
The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed. The signal conditioning
consists of
● One socket
Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bit).

1.3.9.4 Non-volatile element
Non-volatile element - Type

Select one of the following output responses for the non-volatile element:
● Level inverted
Non-volatile element - Input and reset

Non-volatile elements respond in the same way as signal conditioning, but are not retained if
the supply voltage fails. If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output
signal according to the set signal conditioning type (non-inverting, inverting, edge rising with
memory, edge falling with memory).
The non-volatile element consists of
● One socket
The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed.
1.3.9.5 Flashing
Flashing 1
If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module issues a signal to its
socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 at a fixed frequency of 1 Hz.
You can use this to make the LEDs on the operator panel flash, for example.
The logic module consists of
● One plug
● One socket.

Flashing 2
● One plug
● One socket.
Flashing 3
● One plug
● One socket.
1.3.9.6 Flicker
Flicker 1
You can use the "Flicker" logic modules to assign the "Flicker" function to the operator panel
LEDs, for example. If an input signal is pending, the module issues an output signal of 4 Hz.
The function block consists of
● One plug
● One socket
Flicker 2
● One plug
● One socket

Flicker 3
● One plug
● One socket
1.3.9.7 Limit monitor
Hysteresis for limit monitor

Setting of the hysteresis for the limit monitor (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1%
Limit monitor - Marking

Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>"; range: maximum 10 characters.
Limit monitor - Activity

Specification of the motor operating states in which the limit monitor is to be evaluated:
● always (on) (default setting): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running
or at a standstill
● always, except TPF (on+): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position
● Only evaluate if the motor is ON and not in the test position (TPF)
● Only evaluate if the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no
test position (TPF) is detected; example: cos phi monitoring
Limit monitor - Delay

Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response
(signaling). The delay time can be modified during operation.
Limit monitor - Limit

Operating value (0 to 65535, default setting: 0) for triggering a message indicating that the
limit of the corresponding analog value (2 bytes/1 word) has exceeded/undershot the set
limit. This value can be modified during operation.

Limit monitor - Input

Connect the analog plug of the limit monitor to the value that is to be monitored (2 bytes),
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, timer actual value.
Limit monitor - Method

Specification of whether the relevant analog value should be monitored to find out if it is
exceeding (>) or undershooting (<) the limit (default setting: > exceeding).
1.3.9.8 Truth table 2I/1O
Truth table 2I/1O - Input

The truth table 2I/1O consists of
● Two plugs
● One socket.
You can choose which of the four possible input conditions an output signal should be
generated for.
Truth table - Type

Setting of the binary output signal type (0 or 1).

● Three plugs
● One socket
You can choose which of the eight possible input conditions an output signal should be
generated for.
Truth table - Type



● Five plugs
● Two sockets.
You can choose which of the 32 possible input conditions a maximum of two output signals
should be generated for.
Truth table - Type

1.3.9.11 Calculators
Calculator - Input
Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" logic modules integrated in basic unit 2 contain the
standard calculation modes and enable all analog values that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be
adapted, calculated, and converted.
Each calculator consists of:
● One analog plug (Calculator 1) or two analog plugs (Calculator 2)
● One analog socket.
Calculator 1 - Numerator/Offset
Setting of the range of values
● For the numerator of arithmetic function block 1 (-32,768 - +32,767)
● For an offset value, if required (addend within the Calculator 1 formula)
Calculator 1 - Denominator
Setting of the range of values for the denominator of arithmetic function block 1 (0 to 255,
increments of 1).

Calculator 2 - Operating mode

Setting of the operating mode for arithmetic function block 2:
● Both inputs of word type: The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value
at input 2 using a predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters
(numerators, denominators, offsets, operators).
● Inputs 1 and 2 correspond to a D word input: The analog values at inputs 1 and 2 are
processed together as a double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the
low word. The result is calculated by means of the formula defined for this operating
mode using the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output
by the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In this operating mode it is also possible to
process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to display them
(2 bytes/1 word).
Calculator 2 - Numerator 1
Setting of the range of values for numerator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 - +127,
increments of 1).
Calculator 2 - Denominator 1
Setting of the range of values for denominator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255,
increments of 1).
Setting of the range of values for numerator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255,
increments of 1). Only relevant for operating mode 1 (both inputs "word" type).
Setting of the range of values for denominator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 to +127,
increments of 1).
Calculator 2 - Offset
Setting of a range of values (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647) for an offset value (addend
within the Calculator 2 formula), if required.
Calculator 2 - Operator
Setting of the operator (+, -, *, /) for arithmetic function block 2 (only relevant for operating
mode "both inputs 'word' type").

1.3.10 3UF50 compatibility mode
1.3.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode

Activate the "3UF50 - Compatibility mode" checkbox if a SIMOCODE DP device is to be
used by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration. If the 3UF50
compatibility mode is activated, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit 2 with a
3UF50 configuration. In this case, from the point of view of the PLC (master class 1)
communication with SIMOCODE pro is the same as communication with SIMOCODE DP.
SIMOCODE DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics, as well as
DPV1 data records (DR 130, DR 131, DR 133).
1.3.10.2 3UF50 basic type

If the 3UF50 compatibility mode is activated (checkbox), you can set the basic type (1, 2, or
3) used to configure the SIMOCODE 3UF50.
1.3.10.3 3UF50 operating mode

Setting which specifies whether SIMOCODE pro V is to be operated on PROFIBUS DP with
DPV0 functions (standard) or DPV1 functions (including acyclic services and interrupts).
1.3.11 Analog value recording
1.3.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge

Setting of the trigger edge (positive, negative, default setting: positive).
1.3.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger

You can use the pre-trigger value (0 to 100% in 5% increments) to specify the time between
starting analog value recording and the presence of the trigger signal. The pre-trigger is set
as a percentage of the entire sampling time.
1.3.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate

The recording time for any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) determines the sampling rate in
SIMOCODE pro (sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60). It can be set in 0.1 s increments, in
the range 0.1 to 50 s (default setting: 0.1 s).
1.3.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value

The "Analog value recording" function block can be used to record any analog values
(2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.
Select any analog value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro.

1.3.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input

Analog value recording can be started by any signal at the trigger input.
Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, current flowing).
1.3.12 Online parameters
1.3.12.1 Online - status command start pause

Change-over pause active:
With the control functions "Dahlander", "Dahlander reversing starter", "Pole-changing starter"
and "Pole-changing reversing starter", the change-over from fast to slow speed can be
delayed with the set time 0.00 s to 655.35 s; default: 0.00 s).
With the control functions "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter", the change-
over pause extends the time between disconnecting the star contactor and switching on the
delta contactor by the set time.
1.3.12.2 Online - event short circuit

Short-circuit detection has responded.
1.3.12.3 Online - event open circuit

Open circuit detection has responded.
1.3.12.4 Online - event InM deleted

The initialization module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state.
1.3.12.5 Online - event InM programmed

The reparameterization was accepted in the initialization module.
1.3.12.6 Online - event InM read-in

The parameters of the memory module were read into SIMOCODE.
1.3.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly

The device addressing and the I&M data in the initialization module are write-protected.
Parameterization will only be accepted by SIMOCODE pro if the new parameter set is
identical to the data stored in the initialization module at that time.
● Select a parameterization with identical addressing and I&M data
● Deactivate the partial write protection of the initialization module.

1.3.12.8 Online - event InM readonly

The initialization module is fully write-protected.
Deactivate the write protection of the initialization module.
1.3.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly

The memory module is fully write-protected.
Deactivate the write protection of the memory module.
1.3.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible

The initialization modules is completely or partially write-protected. Reparameterization of
SIMOCODE pro is denied because the initialization module is write-protected.
Deactivate write protection of the initialization module.
1.3.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit

1.3.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit

1.3.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit

1.3.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit

1.3.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current

Impermissibly high fault current.
1.3.12.16 Online - E module P last

Last trip current

1.4 Module parameters
1.4.1 Identification
1.4.1.1 Marking
Module parameter - Identification - Designation

Entry of any text, e.g. for plant documentation.
See also
Marking (Page 165)
1.4.2 Configuration
1.4.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module

Selection of an initialization module.
The initialization module allows all system parameter settings to be backed up and
transferred to a new system (in the case of device replacement, for example) without the
need for additional resources or detailed specialist expertise.
Note
The SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units from product version *E09* and
higher do not support the initialization module.
See also
Device configuration (Page 157)
1.4.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro C
basic unit:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter
● Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)

See also
Application selection (Page 167)
1.4.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter
● Star-delta reversing starter
● Dahlander
● Dahlander reversing starter
● Pole-changing starter
● Pole-changing reversing starter
● Valve
● Positioner 1
● Positioner 2
● Positioner 3
● Positioner 4
● Positioner 5
● Soft starter with reversing contactor
● Soft starter.
See also

1.4.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro S
basic unit:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter
● Soft starter
See also
1.4.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor

Activate the "Thermistor" checkbox if you want to use the thermistor (binary PTC) to monitor
motor temperature. When the checkbox is activated, the "Thermistor" motor protection dialog
appears. Here you can define the response when the trip level is reached and the response
in the event of a sensor fault.
See also
Thermistor protection (Page 181)
1.4.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed

If "Yes" is set in the dropdown menu, the message "Removal error" will be output if a
configured operator panel without display is removed.
If "No" is set, the message "Removal error" will not be displayed if the operator panel is
removed during operation. Use this setting if an operator panel is connected temporarily.
Notice
again!
See also
Device configuration (Page 157)

1.4.3 Motor protection
1.4.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor
Motor protection - Voltage measurement - Load type

setting: 3-phase). For a "1-phase" type of load, proceed as follows:
● Deactivate the internal ground-fault detection and unbalance protection
measuring module.
Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
See also
Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
(Page 335)
Overload protection - Type of load

setting).
● If necessary, deactivate internal ground-fault detection.
See also
Overload protection (Page 174)
Overload protection - Reset

Manual (default setting): Faults must be acknowledged by a reset signal:
● Via the "Reset" button on the basic unit or
● Via the "Reset" button on the operator panel or
● Via "Standard functions -> Reset" (the "Reset - Input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to
the corresponding sockets, e.g. using a reset via the bus).
See also
Test/Reset (Page 242)

Motor protection - Thermistor - Response when trip level reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the thermistor trip level is exceeded
(default setting: tripping).
See also
Motor protection - Thermistor - Response to sensor fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a short circuit or if an
open circuit occurs in the thermistor cable (default setting: warning).
See also
Motor protection - Blocking protection - Delay

warning, tripping). This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Blocking protection (Page 180)
Overload protection - Cooling down period

Time setting (60 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 300 s), after which an overload trip can be
reset. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Overload protection - Pause tme

Time setting (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 0 s) for the cooling down response of the motor
when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). This
setting can be modified during operation. After this time the "thermal motor model" will be
deleted and a new cold start will be possible. This means that many startups can be
performed in a short space of time.
See also

Motor protection - Response when trip level reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is exceeded in the
event of an overload (default setting: tripping).
See also
Motor protection - Overload protection - Response when prewarning threshold reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the prewarning level (I> 115 % Is) is
exceeded in the event of an overload (default setting: warning).
See also
Motor protection - Overload protection - Response to unbalance

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a phase unbalance (default
setting: warning).
See also
Overload protection - Class

The Class (tripping class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip
from cold at 7.2 times the setting current (motor protection to IEC 60947). You can choose
between 8 different settings (Class 5 to Class 40). Please note that with startups > Class 10,
the permissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced (derated), i.e. you must
select a larger contactor. The tripping class can be modified during operation.
See also
Motor protection - Delay in the event of overload operation (delay prewarning)

Define how long (default setting: 0.5 s) the prewarning level (1.15 x Is) must be constantly
exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made,
there will be no response. In the event of a loss of phase or an unbalance > 50%, the
prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately 0.85 x Is. You can change this
setting during operation.

See also
Motor protection - Unbalance protection threshold

Setting of the unbalance protection level (0 to 100%, default setting: 40%), which must be
exceeded for SIMOCODE pro to respond. Loss of one phase corresponds to an unbalance
of 100%. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Unbalance protection (Page 179)
Overload protection - Blocking protection threshold

Setting of a blocking threshold for the motor current (0 to 1020% of the set current Is in 4%
increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will react as per the selected
response. The response is triggered as soon as the motor current exceeds this threshold.
See also

Setting of the motor rated current. This value can be found on the rating plate of the motor.
The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value. The setting range depends
on the current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module selected. This setting
can be modified during operation.
See also
Overload protection - Is1-Is2 transformation ratio active

Activate this checkbox if you are using an interposing transformer or looping the main current
lines through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module several
times. If the checkbox is activated, you can enter a transformation ratio.
See also


See also

See also

See also

See also

Set current Is2 can only be set for control functions with two speeds (Dahlander, Dahlander
reversing starter, pole-changing starter, pole-changing reversing starter) as a way of
ensuring that appropriate overload protection is also provided for the higher of the two
speeds.
Is2 is usually set to a value higher than Is1.
The setting range depends on the selected current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module.

See also
Motor protection - Overload protection - Delay in the event of unbalance

warning, tripping).
See also
Motor protection - Blocking protection - Response when blocking threshold reached

Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the blocking threshold is
exceeded (default setting: deactivated).
See also
1.4.4 Motor control
1.4.4.1 Control stations
Control stations - Operation mode switch S1, S2

You can use the operation mode switch to change over between the following operating
modes using any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.):
● Local 1
● Local 2
● Local 3
● Remote/Automatic
See also
Mode selector (Page 186)

Control stations - Activate enables

for each control station in every operating mode. Activate the enables for the "ON" and
"OFF" control commands ("ON" only, "OFF" only, or "ON" and "OFF") for each control
station, depending on whether the control station is to be able to only switch the motor on,
only switch it off, or switch it on and off.
See also
Enables (Page 186)
Enables and enabled control command schematic (Page 187)
Control station - PLC/PCS

Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Cyclic receive" function blocks).
See also
Control stations (Page 183)
Cyclic receive (Page 225)
Acyclic receive (Page 226)
Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) (Page 258)
Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on any PC which, along
with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP.
The control commands are received from the PROFIBUS DPV1 via the acyclic control
telegram.
No connection needs to be established if the SIMOCODE ES Professional or SIMATIC PDM
PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP. In this case, the control
commands will be implemented automatically via the PC control station [DPV1].
See also

Control station - Operator panel

Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Operator panel buttons" function block).
must be used as a speed change-over button for control functions with two speeds and two
directions of rotation. For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/<<>>".
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a PC is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system
interface, its control commands are implemented automatically via the "Operator panel (OP)"
control station and must be enabled here as applicable.
See also
Operator panel buttons (Page 216)
Control station - Local control

Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "BU inputs" and "DM1 inputs" or "DM2 inputs"
function blocks).
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the motor
down if an open circuit occurs in the incoming cable, for example. The precondition is that
the control station is active.
See also
1.4.4.2 Control function
Control function - Auxiliary control input FC

The "Auxiliary control input FC" function block is an expanded status message for the
PC (Feedback Close) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to
See also
Lamp controls and status information (Page 190)

Control function - Auxiliary control input FO

The "Auxiliary control input FO" function block is an expanded status message for the
PO (Feedback Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to
See also
Control function - Auxiliary control input TC

The "Auxiliary control input TC" function block is an expanded status message for the
TC (Torque Closed) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to
See also
Control function - Auxiliary control input TO

The "Auxiliary control input TO" function block is an expanded status message for the
TO (Torque Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to
See also
Control function - Control commands

Plugs of the "Control stations" function block. Connect these plugs to any sockets (e.g.
binary inputs on the basic unit, PROFIBUS DP control bits) so that the control commands
can be implemented. Each control station can output up to five different control commands
(via the plugs ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>).
The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct-on-line
starter, for example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.

See also
Control function (Page 188)
Contactor controls (Page 189)
Control function - Auxiliary control input Feedback ON

SIMOCODE pro monitors statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control channel, which
is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current measuring
modules. Select any socket (usually the preset socket, "Status - Current flowing").
See also
Feedback time (Page 192)
Contactor controls (Page 189)
Scope and application (Page 194)
Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Max. time for star mode
Setting of the maximum time for star mode when switching over from star to delta if the
current-dependent reversing point could not be detected (0 to 255 s, default setting: 20 s).
See also
Max. star time (Page 193)
Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable (Page 193)
Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Integrated current measuring
module
● Select "Incoming cable" if the current measuring module is integrated in the motor supply
cable.
● Select "In delta" if the current measuring module is integrated in the star-delta circuit's
delta. The set current Is is reduced to Irated x √3.
See also

Control function - Type of load

Select either "motor" (default setting) or "resistive load" (e.g. heating). If "Motor" is selected,
following an ON command "Status - Start active" will be set for the duration of the "Class"
that has been set. All current-dependent monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits,
cos phi, active power) only become active once the set "Class" time has elapsed. If
"Resistive load" is selected, "Status - Start active" will not be set. All current-dependent
monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits, cos phi, active power) become active
immediately after the start.
See also
Load type (Page 192)
Control function - Save switching command

● Deactivated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other
are only implemented if "OFF" has previously been set and once the interlocking
time/change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is the default and the one which is
normally used.
● Activated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other are
implemented without a previous "OFF", once the interlocking time/change-over pause has
elapsed.
See also
Saving change-over command (Page 191)
Control function - DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function

● Deactivated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules is also effected by the
SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. Select this
setting for applications where the safety-related disconnection directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
● Activated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. Select this setting for applications where the safety-
related disconnection is not in any way linked to the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
See also
DM-F LOCAL/DM-F PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function (Page 191)

Control function - Jog mode

● Deactivated (default setting): Normal mode: In this operating mode, a control command
(ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) is saved (corresponds to contactor locking).
● Activated: If you want to switch a motor on and off, either just the one time or on a
repeated temporary basis, activate the "Jog mode" checkbox. In this operating mode, a
control command (ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) only remains active as long as a "high
signal" is present at the corresponding plugs.
See also
Non-maintained command mode (Page 191)
Control function - Change-over pause

● Control functions "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter": The change-over from the fast
speed to the slow speed can be delayed by the time set for the change-over pause
(0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0).
● Control function "star/delta": The time that elapses between switching off the star
contactor and switching on the delta contactor is extended by the time set for the change-
over pause (0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0). This setting can be modified during
operation.
See also
Change-over pause (Page 193)
Control function - Execution time

Selection of the execution time (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 1.0 s) for monitoring the start
and shutdown cycle. The start and shutdown cycle must be completed within the set time,
otherwise a fault message will be output. Following an "ON" control command, SIMOCODE
pro must measure the current in the main circuit within the execution time, otherwise the
"Fault - Execution ON command" error message will be output. Following an "OFF" control
command, SIMOCODE pro must not measure any current in the main circuit once the
execution time has elapsed, otherwise the "Fault - Execution OFF command" error message
will be output. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Execution time (Page 192)

Control function - Interlocking time

Setting an interlocking time (0 to 255 s, default 0 s) for the line contactors in the case of the
control functions with reversing function and pole-changing function.
With the interlocking time, the change-over of the direction of rotation or the change-over of
the speed from fast to slow can be time-delayed.
See also
Interlocking time (Page 193)
Control function - Check-back time

Setting of a feedback time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for monitoring the status of the
feeder (ON or OFF). If the status is "ON", the current flow may be interrupted for the duration
of the feedback time, which will then be followed by "Fault - Feedback ON". If the status is
"OFF", current may flow for the duration of the feedback time, which will then be followed by
"Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF". This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Feedback time (Page 192)
1.4.5 Machine monitoring
1.4.5.1 Ground fault
EMplus - Response to sensor fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a sensor fault (default
See also
Ground fault (Page 195)

EMplus - Monitoring - Warning

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the warning level is to take effect:
● if motor is running, except TPF (run): warning level only active if motor is running
● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): warning level only active
if motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.
See also
EMplus - Monitoring
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level is to take effect:
● if motor is running, except TPF (run): trip level only active if motor is running
● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): trip level only active if
motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.
See also
EMplus - Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current (0 to 15% of the threshold value
in 1% increments, default setting: 5 %)
See also
EMplus - Delay - Warning

warning). Can be modified during operation.

See also
EMplus - Trip level

Setting a trip level for the ground-fault current (30 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments, default:
1000 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the trip level, the ground-fault current monitor
responds. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
EMplus - Warning level

Setting a warning level for the ground-fault current (20 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments,
default: 500 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the warning level, the ground-fault
current monitor responds. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
EMplus - Response to warning of an external ground fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level for the ground-
fault current is undershot (default setting: deactivated).
See also
External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196)
EMplus - Response to an external ground fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level for the ground-fault
current is undershot (default setting: signaling)
See also

EMplus - Delay - Trip/warning level

Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping).
Setting range for the delay time if the trip level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting:
0.5 s) 1)
Setting range for the delay time if the warning level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting:
0.1 s) 1)
The delay time can be modified during operation.
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay
See also
External ground-fault monitoring - Delay

Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s), which is an additional delay to
that for the summation current transformer, for the set response (signaling, warning,
See also
Internal ground-fault monitoring - Response

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an internal ground fault (default
See also
Internal ground-fault monitoring (Page 195)
External ground-fault monitoring - Response

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external ground fault (default
setting: signaling).
See also

Internal ground-fault monitoring - Delay

warning, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.
See also
1.4.5.2 Current limits
Monitoring current limits - Trip level I> (high limit)

Setting of a trip level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases exceeds this
level. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Current limits I> (upper limit) (Page 198)
Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I> reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I> is exceeded (default
See also
Monitoring current limits - Warning level I> (high limit)

Setting of a warning level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
alarm. The message or alarm is generated as soon as the current of one or more phases
exceeds this level. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I> reached

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I> is exceeded

See also
Monitoring current limits - Trip level I< (low limit)

Setting of a trip level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases undershoots
this level. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199)
Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I< not reached
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I< is undershot
See also
Monitoring current limits - Warning level I< (low limit)

Setting of a warning level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4%
alarm. The message or alarm is tripped as soon as the current undershoots one or more
phases of this level. This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I< not reached
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I< is undershot
See also

Monitoring current limits - Trip I> delay (high limit)

See also
Monitoring current limits - Warning I> delay (high limit)

See also
Monitoring current limits - Trip < delay (low limit)

See also
Monitoring current limits - Warning I< delay (low limit)

See also
Monitoring current limits - Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for current limits (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1%
See also
Current limits (Page 198)

1.4.5.3 Operation monitoring
Operating hours monitoring - Threshold

Setting of the response threshold (0 to 1,193,046 hours, default setting: 0) for monitoring a
motor's operating hours (service life). This setting can be modified during operation.
See also
Operating hours monitoring (Page 209)
Operation monitoring (Page 207)
Monitoring of operating hours - Response to overshoot

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set threshold (0 to 1,193,046 h)
is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Stop time monitoring - Response to overshoot

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set motor stop time (0 to 65535
h) is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Stop time monitoring (Page 209)
Stop time monitoring - level

Setting of the threshold, i.e. the length of the permissible motor stop time (0 to 65535 hours,
default setting: 0). If the permissible motor stop time is exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts as
per the response which has been selected. The threshold setting can be modified during
operation.
See also

Monitoring the number of starts - Interlocking time

Setting of an interlocking time (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00). If a
new start command is issued within the start period after the last permitted start, it will not be
executed if "Response to overshoot - Tripping" is set. The "Fault - No. of starts >" fault
message is displayed and the set interlocking time is activated. This setting can be modified
during operation.
See also
Number of starts monitoring motor (Page 210)
Monitoring the number of starts - Start period

Setting of a start period (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00) for the
permissible startup procedures. Once the parameterized start period has elapsed, the
maximum number of starts is available once more. This setting can be modified during
operation.
See also
Monitoring the number of starts - Permissible starts

Entry of the maximum number of permissible starts (1 to 255, default setting: 1). The set
"start period" starts to elapse when the first start is executed. The setting of the maximum
number of permissible starts can be modified during operation.
See also
Monitoring the number of starts - Response to prewarning

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond following the penultimate start
See also

Monitoring the number of starts - Response to overshoot

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the number of starts is exceeded
during the start period (default setting: deactivated).
See also
1.4.5.4 Voltage monitoring
Voltage monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit)
has undershot the trip level U< (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Voltage monitoring (Page 201)
Voltage monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit)
has undershot the warning level U< (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Voltage monitoring - Trip level (low limit)

Setting of a trip level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments, default: 0), at
which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor.
level.
See also

Voltage monitoring - Warning level (low limit)

Setting of a warning level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8-V increments, default: 0),
at which SIMOCODE pro will trip the motor.
level.
See also
Voltage monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit)

tripping).
See also
Voltage monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit)

warning).
See also
Voltage monitoring - Activity of trip level

● always (on) 1): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill
● always, except in the case of TPF (on+) (default): trip level always active, regardless of
whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", that is, motor feeder is in
test position
test position
measuring module.

See also
Voltage monitoring - Activity of warning level

● always (on) 1): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill
● always, except in the case of RMT (on+) (default): warning level always active, regardless
of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in
test position
measuring module
See also
Voltage monitoring - Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the hysteresis for the voltage, cos phi and power (0 to 15% of the threshold
See also
1.4.5.5 Cos phi monitoring
Cos phi monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the trip
level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Cos phi monitoring (Page 203)
Cos phi monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the
warning level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).

See also
Cos phi monitoring - Trip level cos phi< (lower limit)

Setting of a trip level cos phi< (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1% increments,
default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor.
See also
Cos phi monitoring - Warning level cos phi< (lower limit)

Setting of a warning level cos phi < (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1%
increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a
warning.
See also
Cos phi monitoring - Trip level delay (lower limit)

tripping).
See also
Cos phi monitoring - Warning level delay (lower limit)

warning).
See also

1.4.5.6 Active power monitoring
Active power monitoring - Response when trip level reached (high limit)
trip level P> (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Active power monitoring (Page 204)
Active power monitoring - Response when warning level reached (high limit)
warning level P> (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Active power monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit)
trip level P< (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Active power monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit)
warning level P< (default setting: deactivated).
See also
Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (high limit)

tripping).
See also

Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (high limit)

warning).
See also
Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit)

tripping).
See also
Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit)

warning).
See also
Active power monitoring - Trip level P> (high limit)

Setting of a trip level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default
See also
Active power monitoring - Warning level P> (high limit)

Setting of a warning level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default

See also
Active power monitoring - Trip level P< (low limit)

Setting of a trip level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default
See also
Active power monitoring - Warning level P< (low limit)

Setting of a warning level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default
See also
1.4.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Trip level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): trip level is always active regardless of whether the motor is
running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test
position
test position
detected.
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (Page 205)

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Warning level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): warning level is always active regardless of whether the motor
is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test
position
(TPF) is detected.
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Trip level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is
test position
detected.
See also

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Warning level activity

● always, except TPF (on+): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is
(TPF) is detected.
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (upper limit)

overshot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (upper limit)

overshot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit)

undershot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
See also

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit)

undershot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (upper limit)

Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (upper limit)

Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (lower limit)

Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (lower limit)

Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA,
See also

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (high limit)

See also
Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (high limit)

See also
Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (low limit)

See also
Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (low limit)

See also
Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA (high limit) - Marking

online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA >";
See also

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (low limit) - Marking

online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA<";
See also
0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA analog signal (0 to 15% of the threshold
See also
1.4.5.8 Temperature monitoring
Temperature monitoring - Response when trip level T> reached

trip level T> (default setting: tripping).
See also
Temperature monitoring (analog) (Page 211)
Temperature monitoring - Response when warning level T> reached

warning level T> (default setting: warning).
See also
Temperature monitoring - Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for the temperature (0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments, default
setting: 5 °C).
See also

Temperature monitoring - Trip level T>

Setting of a trip level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to 65,262
°C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or shut the motor down.
See also
Temperature monitoring - Warning level T>

Setting of a warning level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to
65,262 °C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm.
See also
Temperature monitoring - Trip level marking - Warning level

Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>"; range: maximum
10 characters.
See also
1.4.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Monitoring interval to mandatory testing - response

You can define here the behavior when the set limit is reached (default: deactivated).
See also
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing (Page 213)
Monitoring - Interval to mandatory testing - Test interval

Adjustable limit for the interval for mandatory testing: Range: 0 to 255 weeks (default: 0).
See also

1.4.6 Inputs
1.4.6.1 Digital module inputs
Digital module inputs - Delay

If required, you can set a delay for the inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16 ms) in
order to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly identified as signals, for example. These
values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. The values are approximately
40 ms higher for digital modules with input supplies of 110 to 240 V AC/DC.
Notice
Delay times for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable"
If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the delay time cannot be set.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delay times are set using the DIP switch of the DM-
F Local on the front.
See also
Digital module inputs (Page 218)
1.4.6.2 Basic unit inputs
Basic unit inputs - Delays

If required, you can set a delay for the basic unit inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16
ms) to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly detected as signals, for example.
See also
Basic unit inputs (Page 215)
1.4.6.3 Analog module inputs
Analog module inputs - Active inputs

Select whether only 1 analog module input or 2 analog module inputs are to be activated.
See also
Analog module inputs (Page 223)

Analog module inputs - Response to open circuit

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an open circuit (default setting:
warning).
See also
Analog module inputs - Input signal measuring range

Selection of the range of values (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA, default setting: 0 to 20 mA) of the
analog module input signal.
See also
1.4.6.4 Temperature module inputs
Temperature module inputs - Response to sensor fault/out of range

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a fault in the sensor measuring
circuits (default setting: warning).
See also
Temperature module inputs (Page 221)
Temperature module inputs - Number of active sensors

Setting of the number of active sensors (1, 2, or 3; default setting: 3).
See also
Temperature module inputs - Sensor type

Selection of the sensor type (PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC, default setting: PT100).
See also

1.4.7 Outputs
1.4.7.1 Basic unit outputs
BU output
The "BU output" function block can be activated by any signal (e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP control bits, QE contactor control).
See also
Basic unit (Page 231)
1.4.7.2 Cyclic send data
Cyclic send - Byte 0, byte 1

PROFIBUS DP.
See also
Cyclic send data (Page 238)
Cyclic send - Byte 2/3

PROFIBUS DP.
To activate a word, select any analog value (any socket, e.g. maximum current Imax,
remaining cooling down period, timer actual value, etc.).
See also
Cyclic send - Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9

PROFIBUS DP.
To activate four words, select any analog value.

See also
1.4.7.3 Acyclic send data
Acyclic send
Different types of send data can be transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP
at irregular intervals (acyclically).
See also
Acyclic send data (Page 240)
1.4.7.4 Operator panel LED
OP LED green
Green 1 to Green 4:
The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. feedback,
motor operating state).
See also
Operator panel LED (Page 233)
OP LED yellow
Yellow 1 to yellow 3:
The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. status
displays, events, faults).
See also

1.4.7.5 Digital module outputs
DM - Output
The "DM1 output" and "DM2 output" function blocks can be activated by any signal (any
sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.), usually the QE contactor
controls.
See also
Digital module (Page 234)
1.4.7.6 Analog module - output
Analog module output - Start-value range

Selection of the range of values (0 to 65,535, default setting: 0) for the start value of the
output circuit, this value (and the end-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can be
modified during operation.
See also
Analog module (Page 236)
Analog module output - End-value range

Selection of the range of values (0 to 65535, default setting: 27648) for the end value of the
output circuit, this value (and the start-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can
be modified during operation.
See also
Analog module - Output

The analog module allows you to expand basic unit 2 by one analog output. The
corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro
to be output as a 0/4-20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. If the
function block is activated via the "Assigned analog output value" plug using any integer
value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be
sent to the output terminals of the analog module.

See also
Analog module output - Assigned analog output value

Set any value available in SIMOCODE pro (1 word/2 bytes).
See also
1.4.8 Standard functions
1.4.8.1 OPO - Positioner response

Specification of the positioner response (only for "Positioner" control functions) if an input
signal is pending:
● "CLOSED": Positioner runs in "CLOSED" direction
● "OPEN": Positioner runs in "OPEN" direction.
See also
Operational protection OFF (OPO) (Page 250)
1.4.8.2 Test/Reset
Standard functions - Test/Reset buttons blocked

Activate the "Test/Reset buttons blocked" checkbox if you want to block the Test/Reset
buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel for fault acknowledgment/device tests so
that you can then assign other functions to them instead.
See also
Test 1

See also
Test 2
See also
Reset 1
See also
Reset 2
See also
Reset 3
See also

1.4.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF
Test position feedback (TPF) - Type (level of controlled run-down to cold condition)
In the context of the "Cold restart" function test (testing the motor feeder with no current in
the main circuit), activate the "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the
"Test position feedback" function block to "1-active" (default setting), or the "NC contact"
option if you want to set the same input logic to "0-active".
See also
Test position feedback (TPF) (Page 245)
Test position feedback - Input

See also
1.4.8.4 External fault
External fault 1-6 - Response

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external fault (devices, states)
(default setting: signaling).
See also
External fault (Page 247)
External fault 1-6 - Reset also using

Specification of further (common) acknowledgment options using additional reset types:
● Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the operator
panel with display, via the menu (panel reset) (set by default)
● Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1 to 3, DPV1, "Reset" command (default)
● Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the
activation signal)
● Off command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault
See also

External fault - Input

The "External fault" function block can be used to monitor any statuses or external devices
and to generate fault messages or trip the motor, if required. The block is addressed by the
signal to be monitored: Select any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits.
See also
External fault - Reset input

Test/Reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated.
Acknowledge the "External fault" fault via any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs,
See also
External fault - Marking

Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Speed>"; range: maximum 10 characters.
See also
External fault 1-6 - Activity

Select the "Always" option if a fault evaluation is always to be performed, regardless of
whether the motor is running or at a standstill.
Select the "Only if motor is running" option if a fault evaluation is only to be performed if the
motor is ON.
See also

External fault 1-6 - Type

Activate
● The "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "External fault" function
block to "1-active" (default setting)
● The "NC contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "Test position feedback"
function block to "0-active".
See also
1.4.8.5 Emergency start
Standard functions - Emergency start - Input

The "Emergency start" function block can be addressed by any signal (any sockets, e.g.
device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.) and is edge-active. "Emergency start"
deletes the SIMOCODE pro thermal memory each time it is activated.
See also
Emergency start (Page 253)
1.4.8.6 Safety-related tripping
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Response

Here you can adjust the response of SIMOCODE pro in the case of a safety-related tripping
by the DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe (default: deactivated).
Notes:
1. In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL / Separate PROFIsafe function from control
function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode",
only "Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" can be set and not "Tripping".
2. The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-
See also
Safety-related tripping (Page 254)

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Reset

Here you can specify whether a SIMOCODE pro fault caused by the safety-related
disconnection is to be acknowledged manually or automatically (default: Manual).
See also
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Without / with cross-circuit detection
With/without cross-circuit detection:

Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. You must connect the sensors
between T1 – Y12, Y33 and T2 – Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the T1 terminal test
signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the T2 terminal test signal at the terminals Y22 and
Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33 or Y22 and
Y34 does not agree with the test signals T1 or T2.
Deactivate cross-circuit detection if electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser scanners
are connected. In this case, the DM-F LOCAL no longer monitors the sensor inputs for
cross-circuits. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are already monitored for
cross-circuits in the sensor itself. If "without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the
test outputs T1 and T2 are deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the inputs Y12
and Y22 as well as Y33 and Y34, the DM-F Local expects a 24 V DC signal from the same
current source as the one from which the device receives its power supply (possible only in
the case of DM-F Local*1AB00) or from T3 (static 24 V DC).
In the case of the DM-F Local-*1AU00 variant, you must connect the terminal T3 to the
floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation of the input circuit and sensor supply.
See also
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation
1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation

In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors
with opposite types of contacts (NC/NO), as are frequently used in the case of
electromagnetic switches, can also be evaluated. Make sure that the normally closed contact
is connected to Y12, and the normally open contact to Y22.
See also

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 2 x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel
2 x 1-channel / 1 x 2-channel:
● 2 sensors with one contact each (2 x 1-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both
● 1 sensor with two contacts each (1 x 2-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both
See also
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms
Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms

● Delay 50 ms: Switch position changes of strongly bouncing contacts are suppressed (e.g.
position switches on heavy protective doors).
● Delay 10 ms: The shorter delay permits faster deactivation of bounce-free sensors (e.g.
light arrays).
See also
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start sensor input
Autostart / monitored start sensor input

on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs. The start button
switch-on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs, and the start
button at the Y33 terminal is actuated (start at falling edge).
See also

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start cascading input
Autostart / monitored start cascading input

on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC signal is
switch-on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC
signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the START button at the Y33 terminal is actuated
(start at falling edge).
See also
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With / without startup testing
With / without startup testing

After a power failure, startup testing requires that the system operator actuates the sensors
See also
Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With autom. startup / without autom. startup after power
failure
With automatic startup / without automatic startup after power failure:

The parameters of the DM-F Local can be defined so that the enabling circuits switch
automatically to the active position again after a power failure, i.e. without actuation of the
start button Y33.
Requirements:
● Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start".
● The switch-on condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input is satisfied.
● The START button was actuated before the power failure and this was valid, i.e. the
See also

1.4.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)
Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus/PLC fault - Reset

Select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually.
See also
Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus monitoring

● Activated: If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message is generated and must be
acknowledged.
See also
Standard functions - Watchdog - PLC/PCS monitoring

● Activated: If a PLC fault occurs, the "PLC/PCS fault" fault message is generated and
must be acknowledged.
See also
Watchdog PLC/PCS monitoring - Input

The "Watchdog" function block can be activated by a signal that is to be monitored (e.g.
If PLC/PCS monitoring is activated, a "Fault - PLC/PCS" fault message is generated and
must be acknowledged. If it is deactivated, no fault message is generated.
See also

1.4.8.8 Operational Protection Off
Operational protection off - Input

See also
Operational protection off - Type

Specification of the input logic of the "Operational protection off" function block: Normally
open contact = 1 active (default setting), normally closed contact = 0 active.
See also
1.4.8.9 Power failure monitoring
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Addressing external power failure monitoring

Select any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits).
See also
Power failure monitoring (UVO) (Page 251)
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Type

● Deactivated
● No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is
maintained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate
voltage relay.
See also

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Power failure time
Power failure time

● If the line voltage is restored within the power failure time, all drives which were running
● If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain
disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line
Range:
0 to 25.5 s, in increments of 0.1 s
26 to 255 s, in increments of 1 s
256 to 2550 s, in increments of 10 s.
See also
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Restart time delay

Setting of a restart time delay (0 to 255 s, default setting: 0) to enable staggered motor
startup following power restoration, thus preventing the line voltage from dropping.
See also
Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Fault

The "Power failure monitoring" function block is activated by the signal to be monitored (any
socket, e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
The following setting options are available:
1. All contactors (QE) are disconnected immediately after the monitoring relay has been
operated/the input has been activated (UVO).
2. If the voltage is restored within the "power failure time", the motor will be reset to its
previous state. This can either be done immediately or with a time delay (restart time
delay).
3. If the "power failure time" elapses without the voltage being restored, the device enters
the fault state (undervoltage-off fault).
See also

1.4.8.10 Time stamping
Time stamping active

Possible fields of application:
● Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system
Activate the "Time stamping active" checkbox if you want to use this function.
See also
Time stamping - Input

Select any signal (socket).
See also
1.4.9 Logic modules
1.4.9.1 Counter
Counter - Input +, input -, reset

Counters are activated via the plugs "+" or "-". The counter output switches to "1" when the
preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with "Reset". The current actual value is also
available for internal processing and to the automation system.
● Three plugs (input +, input – and reset)
● One socket

See also
Counter (Page 265)
Limit monitor (Page 274)
Counter - Limit
Value (0 to 65535, default: 0) that can be reached when counting and at which the counter
issues an output signal. This value can be modified during operation.
See also
Counter (Page 265)
1.4.9.2 Timer
Timer - Type
Select one of the following as the type for the timer output signal:
● With off delay
● With fleeting closing
See also
Timer (Page 267)
Timer - Limit
Time (0 to 6,553.5 s, default setting: 0) at which the timer issues an output signal during
addressing, depending on the timer type (output response). This value can be modified
during operation.
See also
Timer (Page 267)

Timer - Input - Reset

The timer consists of
● One socket
The current actual value (reset = 0) is available as a socket for further internal processing
and can also be transmitted to the automation system. If an input signal is pending, the timer
issues an output signal according to the chosen timer type:
● Closing delay (with and without memory)
● Opening delay
With fleeting closing
See also
Timer (Page 267)
1.4.9.3 Signal conditioning
Signal conditioning - Type

Select one of the following as the type for the signal conditioning output signal:
● Level inverted
See also
Signal conditioning (Page 268)

Signal conditioning- Input and reset

● Non-inverting
● Inverting
The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed. The signal conditioning
consists of
● One socket
See also
1.4.9.4 Non-volatile element
Non-volatile element - Type

Select one of the following output responses for the non-volatile element:
● Level inverted
See also
Non-volatile element (Page 270)

Non-volatile element - Input and reset

Non-volatile elements respond in the same way as signal conditioning, but are not retained if
the supply voltage fails. If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output
signal according to the set signal conditioning type (non-inverting, inverting, edge rising with
memory, edge falling with memory).
● One socket
The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed.
See also
1.4.9.5 Flashing
Flashing 1
● One plug
● One socket.
See also
Flashing (Page 272)

Flashing 2
● One plug
● One socket.
See also
Flashing (Page 272)
Flashing 3
● One plug
● One socket.
See also
Flashing (Page 272)
1.4.9.6 Flicker
Flicker 1
● One plug
● One socket
See also
Flicker (Page 273)

Flicker 2
● One plug
● One socket
See also
Flicker (Page 273)
Flicker 3
● One plug
● One socket
See also
Flicker (Page 273)
1.4.9.7 Limit monitor
Hysteresis for limit monitor

Setting of the hysteresis for the limit monitor (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1%
See also
Limit monitor - Marking

Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>"; range: maximum 10 characters.
See also

Limit monitor - Activity

Specification of the motor operating states in which the limit monitor is to be evaluated:
● always (on) (default setting): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running
or at a standstill
● always, except TPF (on+): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position
● Only evaluate if the motor is ON and not in the test position (TPF)
● Only evaluate if the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no
test position (TPF) is detected; example: cos phi monitoring
See also
Limit monitor - Delay

Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response
(signaling). The delay time can be modified during operation.
See also
Limit monitor - Limit

Operating value (0 to 65535, default setting: 0) for triggering a message indicating that the
limit of the corresponding analog value (2 bytes/1 word) has exceeded/undershot the set
limit. This value can be modified during operation.
See also
Limit monitor - Input

Connect the analog plug of the limit monitor to the value that is to be monitored (2 bytes),
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, timer actual value.
See also

Limit monitor - Method

Specification of whether the relevant analog value should be monitored to find out if it is
exceeding (>) or undershooting (<) the limit (default setting: > exceeding).
See also

● Two plugs
● One socket.
generated for.
See also
Truth table 2I/1O (Page 262)
Truth table - Type

See also


● Three plugs
● One socket
generated for.
See also
Truth table - Type

See also

● Five plugs
● Two sockets.
See also

Truth table - Type

See also
1.4.9.11 Calculators
Calculator - Input
Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" logic modules integrated in basic unit 2 contain the
standard calculation modes and enable all analog values that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be
adapted, calculated, and converted.
See also
Calculator 1 (Page 276)
Calculator 1 - Numerator/Offset
Setting of the range of values
● For the numerator of arithmetic function block 1 (-32,768 - +32,767)
● For an offset value, if required (addend within the Calculator 1 formula)
See also
Calculator 1 - Denominator
Setting of the range of values for the denominator of arithmetic function block 1 (0 to 255,
increments of 1).
See also

Calculator 2 - Operating mode

Setting of the operating mode for arithmetic function block 2:
● Both inputs of word type: The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value
at input 2 using a predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters
(numerators, denominators, offsets, operators).
● Inputs 1 and 2 correspond to a D word input: The analog values at inputs 1 and 2 are
processed together as a double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the
low word. The result is calculated by means of the formula defined for this operating
mode using the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output
by the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In this operating mode it is also possible to
process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to display them
(2 bytes/1 word).
See also
Setting of the range of values for numerator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 - +127,
increments of 1).
See also
Setting of the range of values for denominator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255,
increments of 1).
See also
Setting of the range of values for numerator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255,
increments of 1). Only relevant for operating mode 1 (both inputs "word" type).
See also

Setting of the range of values for denominator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 to +127,
increments of 1).
See also
Calculator 2 - Offset
Setting of a range of values (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647) for an offset value (addend
within the Calculator 2 formula), if required.
See also
Calculator 2 - Operator
Setting of the operator (+, -, *, /) for arithmetic function block 2 (only relevant for operating
mode "both inputs 'word' type").
See also
1.4.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode

Activate the "3UF50 - Compatibility mode" checkbox if a SIMOCODE DP device is to be
used by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration. If the 3UF50
compatibility mode is activated, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit 2 with a
3UF50 configuration. In this case, from the point of view of the PLC (master class 1)
communication with SIMOCODE pro is the same as communication with SIMOCODE DP.
SIMOCODE DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics, as well as
DPV1 data records (DR 130, DR 131, DR 133).
See also
3UF50 compatibility mode - diagram of the data (Page 282)

1.4.10.2 3UF50 basic type

If the 3UF50 compatibility mode is activated (checkbox), you can set the basic type (1, 2, or
3) used to configure the SIMOCODE 3UF50.
See also
1.4.10.3 3UF50 operating mode

Setting which specifies whether SIMOCODE pro V is to be operated on PROFIBUS DP with
DPV0 functions (standard) or DPV1 functions (including acyclic services and interrupts).
See also
1.4.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge

Setting of the trigger edge (positive, negative, default setting: positive).
See also
Analog value recording (Page 310)
1.4.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger

You can use the pre-trigger value (0 to 100% in 5% increments) to specify the time between
starting analog value recording and the presence of the trigger signal. The pre-trigger is set
as a percentage of the entire sampling time.
See also
1.4.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate

The recording time for any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) determines the sampling rate in
SIMOCODE pro (sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60). It can be set in 0.1 s increments, in
the range 0.1 to 50 s (default setting: 0.1 s).

See also
1.4.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value

The "Analog value recording" function block can be used to record any analog values
(2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.
Select any analog value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro.
See also
1.4.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input

Analog value recording can be started by any signal at the trigger input.
Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, current flowing).
See also
1.4.12 Online parameters
1.4.12.1 Online - status command start pause

Change-over pause active:
With the control functions "Dahlander", "Dahlander reversing starter", "Pole-changing starter"
and "Pole-changing reversing starter", the change-over from fast to slow speed can be
delayed with the set time 0.00 s to 655.35 s; default: 0.00 s).
With the control functions "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter", the change-
over pause extends the time between disconnecting the star contactor and switching on the
delta contactor by the set time.
See also
Saving change-over command (Page 191)
1.4.12.2 Online - event short circuit


See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.3 Online - event open circuit

See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.4 Online - event InM deleted

The initialization module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state.
See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.5 Online - event InM programmed

The reparameterization was accepted in the initialization module.
See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.6 Online - event InM read-in

The parameters of the memory module were read into SIMOCODE.
See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly

The device addressing and the I&M data in the initialization module are write-protected.
Parameterization will only be accepted by SIMOCODE pro if the new parameter set is
identical to the data stored in the initialization module at that time.
● Select a parameterization with identical addressing and I&M data
● Deactivate the partial write protection of the initialization module.

See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.8 Online - event InM readonly

The initialization module is fully write-protected.
Deactivate the write protection of the initialization module.
See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly

The memory module is fully write-protected.
Deactivate the write protection of the memory module.
See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible

The initialization modules is completely or partially write-protected. Reparameterization of
SIMOCODE pro is denied because the initialization module is write-protected.
See also
Messages (Page 298)
1.4.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit

See also
Warnings (Page 294)
1.4.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit


See also
Warnings (Page 294)
1.4.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit

See also
Faults (Page 288)
1.4.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit

See also
Faults (Page 288)
1.4.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current

Impermissibly high fault current.
See also
1.4.12.16 Online - E module P last

Last trip current
See also

1.5 Help texts for function blocks and connection blocks in the CFC Editor
1.5 Help texts for function blocks and connection blocks in the
CFC Editor
1.5.1 Protection/Control
The function block "Protect/control" is the central motor protection and control block that
performs the fundamental motor protection and control functions dependent on the selected
control function, the pending input signals, and the set parameters.
See also
1.5.2 Extended protection

The function block "Extended protection" is the extended part of the central function block
"Protect/control" and contains additional parameters and status signals related to the motor
protection functions.
See also
Motor protection introduction (Page 173)
1.5.3 Extended control

The function block "Extended control" is the advanced part of the central function block
"Protection/control" and contains additional parameters and status signals related to the
control function.
See also
1.5.4 Control stations

Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor or
SIMOCODE pro. The "Control stations" function block is used for administration, switching
and prioritization of these different control stations.

See also
1.5.5 Thermistor
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary
PTC thermistors which can be connected to the basic unit.
See also

This function block can be used to record any analog values in SIMOCODE pro over a set
period of time.
See also
1.5.7 Ground fault

SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the
summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible fault current or ground fault.
See also
1.5.8 Current limits

Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring independent of overload
protection. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for freely
selectable upper and lower current limit values.

See also
1.5.9 Voltage
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase
network or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits.
Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules. This is based on
the minimum voltage of all voltages Umin.
See also
1.5.10 Power factor (cos phi)

Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of
application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly.
See also
1.5.11 Active power

SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the active power for freely selectable
upper and lower current limits.
See also
1.5.12 0/4-20 mA (analog module 1)

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the
number of start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.

See also
1.5.13 Operation monitoring

See also
1.5.14 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling
circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts anew every time the enabling circuit
closes. This function supports you in maintaining test intervals requiring verification.
See also
1.5.15 Temperature (TM1)

Temperature monitoring (e.g. of the motor windings, or the motor bearings) can be
performed using up to three analog temperature sensors. Temperature monitoring takes into
account the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module.
See also
1.5.16 BU inputs
Appropriate to the inputs on the basic unit, the function block "BU inputs" with four binary
inputs is available in SIMOCODE pro. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local
control station to the inputs.

See also
1.5.17 OP buttons
The operator panel contains freely usable buttons. Correspondingly, the "OP buttons"
function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.
See also
1.5.18 DM1 inputs, DM2 inputs

Appropriate to the digital modules, SIMOCODE pro has the "DM inputs" function blocks,
each with 4 binary inputs. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control
station to the inputs.
See also
1.5.19 TM1 inputs

Appropriate to the temperature module, SIMOCODE pro has a "TM inputs" function block
with three analog sockets corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits. The
temperature (in K) of the three measuring circuits can be read from these sockets. An
additional analog socket always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured
temperatures.
See also
1.5.20 AM1 inputs

The inputs of the analog module are available on the appropriate "AM inputs" function block.
On the corresponding analog sockets of the function block, the analog signal is represented
as a word in S7 format (0 to 27648).
See also

1.5.21 Cycl. receive byte 0, cycl. receive byte 1, cycl. receive byte 2/3, cycl. receive
byte 4/5
With the "Cyclic receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data from the
automation system will be further processed via SIMOCODE pro.
See also
1.5.22 BU outputs
Appropriate to the relay outputs on the basic unit, the function block "BU outputs" with three
binary outputs is available in SIMOCODE pro. The relay outputs can be used to activate
contactors or indicator lights, for example.
See also
Basic unit (Page 231)
1.5.23 OP LED
The freely usable LEDs of the operator panel can be activated for displaying any status
information using the "OP LED" function block.
See also
1.5.24 DM1 outputs, DM2 outputs

Appropriate to the digital modules, SIMOCODE pro has the "DM outputs" function blocks,
each with two binary outputs. The relay outputs can be used to activate contactors or
indicator lights, for example.
See also
Digital module (Page 234)

1.5.25 AM1 output

Appropriate to the output of the analog module, each analog value (0 to 65535) present in
SIMOCODE pro can be mapped or output to a 0/4-20 mA signal using the "AM output"
function block.
See also
1.5.26 Cycl. send byte 0, cycl. send byte 1, cycl. send byte 2/3, cycl. send byte 4/9,
cycl. send byte 10/19
The "Cyclic send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred
cyclically to the automation system.
See also
1.5.27 Test 1
A function test of SIMOCODE pro with testing/disconnection of the output relay can be
initialized using the "Test 1" function block.
1.5.28 Test 2
A function test of SIMOCODE pro with testing/disconnection of the output relay can be
initialized using the "Test 2" function block (usually for test via the bus).
See also
1.5.29 Reset 1,2,3

In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal reset via the
function blocks.
See also

1.5.30 TPF
You can carry out the "Cold run" function test of the motor feeder using the "Test position
feedback (TPF)" function block. Current flow in the main circuit results here in immediate
shutdown for safety reasons.
See also
1.5.31 External fault 1,2,3,4,5,6

The "External fault 1-6" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or external
devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor.
See also
1.5.32 OPO
The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into a safe
position or switches a motor off.
See also
1.5.33 UVO
The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is carried
out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary inputs
of SIMOCODE pro.
See also

1.5.34 Emergency start

Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated.
This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. If emergency starts
are performed too frequently this may result in thermal overloading of the motor!
See also
Emergency start (Page 253)
1.5.35 Safety-related tripping

Function block for defining the SIMOCODE pro response to safety-related tripping via DM-F
LOCAL or DM-F PROFIsafe.
See also
1.5.36 Watchdog
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via PROFIBUS DP, as
well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.
See also
1.5.37 Time stamping

See also
1.5.38 Truth table TT 1 to 9, 3I/1O

Truth tables enable the logical combination (AND, OR ...) of binary input signals with one or
more binary output signal(s) in the form of a table.

See also
1.5.39 Counters 1 to 4
Counters can be activated via the "+" or "-" connectors, or reset via their reset input. The
actual counter value is always between 0 and the set limit value. When the limit value is
reached, the counter output is activated.
See also
Counter (Page 265)
1.5.40 Timers 1 to 4
If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer
type. The timer is restarted or the actual timer value is reset via the reset input.
See also
Timer (Page 267)
1.5.41 Signal conditioning 1 to 4

The signal conditioning can be used to invert binary input signals, evaluate edges, or
implement flip-flops.
See also
1.5.42 Non-volatile elements 1 to 4

The non-volatile elements can be used to invert binary input signals, evaluate edges, or
implement flip-flops. In contrast to the signal conditioning, the switching state of the output
signal is not lost here even if the supply voltage is lost.
See also

1.5.43 Flashing 1, 2, 3
See also
Flashing (Page 272)
1.5.44 Flicker 1, 2, 3
If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flicker" logic module issues a signal to its
See also
Flicker (Page 273)
1.5.45 Limit monitors 1 to 4

With the limit monitor, any analog values (2 bytes / 1 word) can be monitored for limit
overshooting or limit undershooting. The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket.
The unit of the monitored analog value must be noted when setting the limit value.
See also
1.5.46 Calculator 1 to 2
The calculators can perform the basic arithmetic operations, and they enable the adaptation,
calculation and conversion of each analog value available in SIMOCODE pro.
See also

1.5.47 Device o.k.

This status information is shown when SIMOCODE pro functions as intended.
1.5.48 Current flowing

SIMOCODE pro's current measuring module provides the feedback as to whether current is
flowing on the main current side.
1.5.49 Device test active

This status information is shown when SIMOCODE pro is in the device test state.
1.5.50 General fault

This status information is shown when there is a general fault.
See also
Faults (Page 288)
1.5.51 General warning

This status information is shown when there is a general warning.
See also
Warnings (Page 294)
1.5.52 Remote mode

This status information is shown when SIMOCODE pro is in Remote mode.
1.5.53 Hardware fault basic unit

This fault exists when the hardware of the SIMOCODE pro basic unit is defective.

1.5.54 Module fault

This fault exists when the hardware of the SIMOCODE pro module is not ready for operation.
1.5.55 Temporary components

This fault exists when a fault has been detected in the memory module, the address
connector, or the PC cable at the system interface.
1.5.56 Configuration error

This fault exists when the set device configuration does not agree with the actual
configuration of SIMOCODE pro.
1.5.57 Parameterization
This fault exists when there is an error in the parameter data.
1.5.58 '0'
Constant level logic "0".
1.5.59 '1'
Constant level logic "1".
1.5.60 Fixed level

Fixed level for analog constant.
1.5.61 Configured operator panel missing

Configured operator panel has been removed.
1.5.62 Phase unbalance

Phase unbalance: Range: 0 … 100, unit: 1 %.

1.5.63 Voltage U_min

Minimum of the three phase voltages U_min, unit: V.
1.5.64 Power factor (cos phi)

Power factor: Range: 0 … 100, unit: 1 %.
1.5.65 Thermal motor model

Thermal motor model: Range: 0 ... 254, unit: %.
1.5.66 Time to trip

Time to trip: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 100 ms
1.5.67 Remaining cooling down period

Remaining cooling down period: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 100 ms
1.5.68 Last trip current (% of le)

Last trip current: Range: 0...65535, unit: 1% of Ie.
1.5.69 Stop time

Stop time: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1 h
1.5.70 Max. current I_max (% of Ie)

Maximum current of all phases: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1% of Ie.
1.5.71 Current I_L1 (% of Ie), current I_L2 (% of Ie), current I_L3 (% of Ie)
Phase current: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1% of Ie.

1.5.72 Number of overload trips

Number of overload trips: Range: 0 ... 65535.
1.5.73 Int. number of overload trips

Internal number of overload trips: Range: 0 ... 65535.
1.5.74 Number of parameterizations

Number of parameterizations: Range: 0 ... 65535
1.5.75 Phase voltage UL1-N, phase voltage UL2-N, phase voltage UL3-N
Phase voltage: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1 V
1.5.76 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word)

Motor operating hours: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 s
1.5.77 Int. motor operating hours (H word), int. motor operating hours (L word)
Internal motor operating hours: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 s
1.5.78 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word)

Operating state of the basic unit: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 s
1.5.79 Number of starts (H word), number of starts (L word)

Number of starts: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF
1.5.80 Int. number of starts clockwise (H word), int. number of starts clockwise (L
word)
Number of starts CW: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF

1.5.81 Int. number of starts counterclockwise (H word), int. number of starts

counterclockwise (L word)
Number of starts CCW: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF
1.5.82 Consumed energy (H word), consumed energy (L word)

Consumed energy: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 kWh
1.5.83 Active power P (H word), active power P (L word)

Active power: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 W
1.5.84 Apparent power S (H word), apparent power S (L word)

Apparent power: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 VA
1.5.85 Max. current I_max (10 mA)

Maximum current of all phases: Range: 0 ... ??, unit: 10 mA
1.5.86 Current I_L1 (10 mA), current I_L2 (10 mA), current I_L3 (10 mA)
Phase current: Range: 0 ... 65535, unit: 10 mA
1.5.87 Max. current I_max (100 mA)

Maximum current of all phases: Range: 0 ... ??, unit: 100 mA
1.5.88 Current I_L1 (100 mA), current I_L2 (100 mA), current I_L3 (100 mA)
Phase current: Range: 0 ... 65535, unit: 100 mA


General information 2
2.1 SIMOCODE ES - Online Help
Description
For every SIMOCODE ES dialog box, there is a help topic in the Online Help. Some of the
topics are very extensive. Reference is made to further information at many points.
Representation of default values

1. Default values are displayed in bold type
Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
2. Default values have an additional "Default" line
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 40 %
"Additional information" folder

The Online Help contains an "Additional information" folder that includes the following
information:
● Configuring example: reversing starter
● Table of the active control stations, contactor controls and lamp controls
● Different examples
● Different data sets
Note
Observe the operating instructions / manuals for the components used.
See also
Limit monitor example (Page 338)

General information
2.2 System manuals for SIMOCODE pro
2.2 System manuals for SIMOCODE pro

You can find the system manual for SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS on the Internet: System
manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300)

Device configuration 3
This dialog box gives you an overview of the device configuration. You can use this for
system documentation purposes, for example.
Basic unit
Select SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V as the basic unit. In doing
so, you define the supported range of functions/parameters of the basic unit, and any
additional modules.
Version
Firmware revision level for the selected basic unit:
● SIMOCODE pro C basic unit: Select V1.0 or V2.0
● SIMOCODE pro S basic unit: Select V1.0
● SIMOCODE pro V basic unit: Select V1.1, V2.0, V3.0, V3.1 or V3.2.
Thermistor
The basic units provide the option of connecting thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for
monitoring the motor temperature. Activate the checkbox ☑ when you want to use this
option. If the checkbox is activated, the Thermistor (Page 181) dialog box is additionally set
up in the "Motor protection" folder. You can edit the thermistor parameters there.
Modules
The modules are inserted in the device view by dragging & dropping them from the hardware
catalog. During dragging & dropping, the order designation of the module is shown against a
blue background.
The following modules are available for selection:
● Current measurement: Select the current measuring module with the correct current
range here.
● Digital module 1: Specify here whether a digital module with monostable, bistable or
safety outputs (DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe) is to be used.
Note
The fail-safe digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe can be activated from
firmware revision level V3.0.

Device configuration
● Digital module 2: Specify here whether a digital module with monostable or bistable
outputs is to be used.
● Operator panel: Specify here whether an operator panel is to be used.
● Voltage measurement: Specify here whether a current/voltage measuring module is to be
used for monitoring the voltage, the power factor (cos-phi) or the active power.
● Voltage display: Select "Phase voltage" or "Line-to-line voltage" here (default: phase
voltage). Can only be activated if Version = V3.0 and a current measuring module has
been selected.
● Temperature module 1/2. Choose here whether or not a temperature module is to be
used for temperature monitoring (e.g. for monitoring the motor windings, motor bearings,
coolant temperature, or gearbox temperature).
Temperature modul 2 can only be activated if temperature module 1 has been
configured.
● Analog module 1/2: Specify here whether the analog signals of a transducer (normalized
output signal 0/4 - 20 mA) are to be monitored.
Analog module 2 can only be activated if analog module 1 has been configured.
● Ground-fault module: Specify here whether external ground-fault monitoring via a
summation current transformer and a ground-fault module is to be used.
External ground-fault monitoring is normally used on networks that are grounded with
high impedance.
● Ground-fault module. Select here whether external ground-fault monitoring is to be used
via a summation current transformer and a ground-fault module.
If yes, select
– The 3UF500 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL22 summation current
transformer)
– The 3UF7510 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL23 residual current
transformer)
– The multifunction module (only with SIMOCODE pro S basic unit in conjunction with
the 3UL23 residual current transformer).
Note
• The 3UL23 residual current transformer is suitable for detecting pure AC fault currents
and AC fault currents with a pulsating direct-current component.
• Requirement for the use of a 3UF7510 ground-fault module:
Use of this ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with at least
product version *E10* (from 09/2013).
External ground-fault monitoring is normally used in the following cases:

- Where networks with high impedance are grounded
- Where precise measurement of the ground-fault current is necessary, e.g. for the
purpose of condition monitoring.

DANGER
No personnel protection or fire protection!
The 3UF75* ground-fault modules monitor devices and systems for correct functioning.
They are not suitable for personnel protection or protection against fire.
Configuration error due to missing operator panel without display

Normally, a missing configured operator panel results in the error message "Configuration
error". "Yes" is set in the dropdown menu.
If "No" is set in the dropdown menu, the message "Configuration error" will not be displayed
if the operator panel is removed during operation. Use this setting if an operator panel is
connected temporarily.
Note
again.
Application (control function)

Select the application (control function) for which parameters are to be set.
Note
If you modify the application (control function) at a later date, this can, under certain
circumstances, result in indirect parameter changes, in other words, parameters that do not
exist for the newly selected control function will be set to "not connected" or to default
values.
Selection of an initialization module

The device parameters, the device addressing and the identification data (I&M data) are
stored in an initialization module permanently installed in the switchgear or motor control
center. When the SIMOCODE pro device is started up, this data is loaded into the
SIMOCODE basic unit. When parameterizing SIMOCODE pro, this data is also additionally
written to the initialization module.
See also


Diagnostics & Online 4
4.1 General information
Description
SIMOCODE ES is a TIA Portal-based software tool for configuring, parameterizing,
commissioning and diagnosing SIMOCODE pro switching devices.
Select Devices > Project > SIMOCODE > Online & Diagnostics in the Project navigation
view.
The Diagnostics > General button contains the information on the modules and the
manufacturer.
Table 4- 1 Module
Information Meaning
Short code Short code of the device
Order number Order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable
product designation)
Hardware Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Hardware_Revision 1)
Firmware Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision 1)
Firmware expansion Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision 1)
Rack Rack specifications
Slot Device slot
1) Manufacturer internal information
Table 4- 2 Module information
Information Meaning
Device name Device designation
Module name Module designation
Plant identifier Plant designation
Location designation Location specifications
Installation date Date of installation / commissioning
Additional information Additional Information

Diagnostics & Online
4.1 General information
Table 4- 3 Manufacturer information
Information Meaning
Description of manufacturer Name of manufacturer
Serial number Order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable
product designation)
Copyright entry Copyright information 1)
Profile Name of the higher-level device family, e.g. switching devices
Profile details Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family, e.g.
motor management system
1) Manufacturer internal information
See also
Device (Page 165)

4.2 Diagnostics status
4.2 Diagnostics status
Status of the device diagnostics

Select Devices > Project > SIMOCODE > Online & Diagnostics in the Project navigation
view.
The Diagnostics > Diagnostics Status button shows the status and the standard diagnostics
of the general modules.
The device-specific diagnostics dialog boxes are displayed via the "Commissioning editor".
Supported diagnostics dialog boxes:
● Control/status information
● Faults/warnings/messages
● Measured values
● Service data/statistical data
● Error buffer/error protocol
● Test
● Command
● Password
● Parameter comparison
● Actual configuration
● Analog value recording
● Hardware inputs and outputs
Structure of the diagnostics dialog boxes

● Faults and warnings are indicated using colored icons.
The colors are defined according to system technology (e.g. red for fault/error).
● Messages are output in the form of lists
● Measured values/statistical data are output in the edit fields
● Recorded values are displayed in a curve control
● Faults/warnings/measured values that belong together are grouped

4.3 Channel diagnostics
4.3 Channel diagnostics

Select Devices > Project > SIMOCODE > Online & Diagnostics > Channel Diagnostics in the
Project navigation view.
Channel diagnostics indicate any device fault or configuration error. If SIMOCODE ES is
installed, this information can also be viewed in the commissioning editor.
Channel diagnostics are also available if the Step7+ and SIMOCODE ES applications are
installed in parallel.

Parameterization of the modules 5
5.1 Identification
5.1.1 Device
The dialog box provides you with an overview of device-specific information. You can use
the overview for system documentation purposes, for example.
In the Project Navigation Devices view, you call up the device data with the menu command
"Project > SIMOCODE > Parameter > Identification".
Table 5- 1 Device
Information Meaning
Order number Order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable product
designation)
Short code Short code of the device
Vendor SIEMENS AG
Device family Name of the higher-level device family, e.g. switching devices
Device subfamily Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family, e.g. motor management
system
5.1.2 Marking
You can freely edit the following product descriptions:
● Plant identifier
● Location designation
● Installation date
● Description.
You can use these descriptions for system documentation purposes, for example. The data
is read out directly from the switching device, or from the device via online connection.
You have a total of 124 characters available.

Parameterization of the modules
5.2 Libraries
5.2 Libraries
General information
Objects are stored for re-use in the libraries. Use the extensive libraries with off-the-shelf
statements and objects. Programming of the statements and objects is not necessary so the
likelihood of errors is reduced.
Note
Supplied libraries
In the global library "SimocodeApplications", you will find ready-made device configurations
for the respective application. You can transfer these to the project by dragging & dropping.
Project libraries
For each project, there is a project library that is integrated into the project. The project
library contains objects that can be re-used within the project.
The project library is always opened, saved and closed together with the current project.
Global libraries
As well as the project library, any number of global libraries can be created independently of
any specific project. The libraries are compatible with each other and can be used across
project boundaries. The library elements can be copied and moved between libraries. Other
users have access to global libraries stored centrally.
Procedure:
● Create templates, for example, for objects
● Insert the templates into the project library
● Develop the objects further
● Place a copy in the global library
● Make the global libraries available to the other personnel in your project
● Adapt the objects to your personal requirements.
Copy templates
The objects can be saved as copy templates and re-inserted into the project later. You can,
for example, save entire devices with their contents or cover sheets as copy templates for
the system documentation.

5.3 Application selection
Description
If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in SIMOCODE ES, all
protective functions, links and interlocks for the reversing starter are set up in the basic unit.
Note
Supplied libraries
If you modify the preset application, you may under certain circumstances have to re-adapt
many protective functions, links and interlocks manually. In the global library
"SimocodeApplications", you will find ready-made device configurations for the respective
application. You can transfer these to the project by dragging & dropping.
You can choose here between the following control functions depending on the basic unit
used:
Control function Brief description

Overload relay SIMOCODE pro behaves like an overload relay.
Direct starter Switching motors on and off
Reversing starter Controlling the direction of rotation of motors (clockwise, counter-
clockwise)
Molded case circuit Switching a circuit breaker on and off (e.g. 3WL, 3VL)
breaker (MCCB)
Star-delta starter To limit the starting current, SIMOCODE pro initially starts the
motor with a star-connected stator winding and then switches it to
delta.
Star-delta reversing starter Star-delta starter with both directions of rotation (clockwise,
counter-clockwise)
Dahlander Controlling motors with only one stator winding in two speed
stages (fast, slow)
Dahlander reversing Dahlander with both directions of rotation (clockwise, counter-
starter clockwise)
Pole-changing starter Controlling motors with two stator windings in two speed stages
(fast, slow)
Pole-changing reversing Pole-changing starter with both directions of rotation (clockwise,
starter counter-clockwise)
Valve Activation of a solenoid valve
Positioner (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Activation of positioners or actuators. Versions 1 to 5
Soft starter Activation of the 3RW soft starter
Soft starter with reversing Activation of the 3RW soft starter including an additional
contactor reversing contactor.

See also
Libraries (Page 166)

5.4 Fieldbus interface
5.4.1 Device parameters

If parameters for the connected device or the actual settings are not available, they are
grayed out in the display.
Station address
The addresses of all devices connected to the bus must be unique, i.e. each address can be
assigned only once to a single unit.
Setting range: 1 to 126
Baud rate
Automatic baud rate detection
Applicable baud rates: 9.6 kBd / 19.2 kBd / 45.45 kBd / 93.75 kBd / 187.5 kBd / 500 kBd /
1500 kBd / 3000 kBd / 12000 kBd
Note
If you change the address and download it to the device, the new address does not take
effect until
• you switch the supply voltage off and on again or
• you enter the "Restart" command.
Group diagnostics
You use this parameter to specify whether or not diagnostics via PROFIBUS DP (fault type)
should be enabled or disabled.
Waiting for start-up parameter datasets

This bit is set directly by the Object Manager if a DPV1 is configured using STEP 7. It tells
the motor starter if a data set will be transmitted. The start-up phase of the starter is
interrupted until the complete data set has been transmitted
Response to CPU/master STOP

You use this device parameter to specify how the motor starter is to respond in the event of
a CPU/master stop:
● Retain last value
● Switch substitute value
Note
This device parameter is only relevant in "automatic mode".

Substitute value
In the event of a bus failure, the outputs of the motor starters are controlled by a
corresponding substitute process image.
Note
This device parameter is only relevant if you have parameterized "response to CPU/master
STOP" as "Use substitute value"!
"0" is the only permissible substitute value for some motor starters. In this case, all input
options for the substitute value are grayed out.
The substitute value comprises the following bits, which vary depending on the unit type:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning

0.0 Motor RIGHT 1.0 Output 1
0.1 Motor LEFT 1.1 Output 2
0.2 Brake 1.2 Select active parameter set
0.3 Trip reset 1.3
0.4 Emergency start 1.4 Reduction factor - bit 0
0.5 Self-test 1.5 Reduction factor - bit 1
0.6 Creep feed 1.6 Reduction factor - bit 2
0.7 Reserved 1.7 Disable quick stop
Startup parameter block

Activate this parameter with the checkbox ☑.
With this parameter, you instruct SIMOCODE pro to ignore all parameter data sent to the
individual devices at startup of the DP master. The current parameter data that SIMOCODE
pro has saved are not overwritten by the DP master in this case. When "Startup parameter
block" is activated, you can only change the parameter data by entering new parameters
with SIMOCODE ES.
Default setting:
● Activated, when parameterizing in SIMOCODE ES directly
● Not activated
– after executing the "Factory settings" command in the online "Command" dialog
– when integrating using SIMOCODE
Activated when parameterizing directly in SIMOCODE ES. Not activated after executing the
"Factory settings" command in the online "Command" dialog when integrating using
SIMOCODE.

Diagnostics
By selecting the corresponding checkbox, you can specify which diagnostics data are to be
signaled via PROFIBUS:
● Diagnostics for device faults
● Diagnostics for process faults
● Diagnostics for process warnings
● Diagnostics for process events.
Further information: Configuring the diagnostics response (Page 333)
5.4.2 PROFIBUS address
Bus parameters
NOTICE
Assigning a new address
When changing the PROFIBUS address, the online connection to PROFIBUS is
interrupted. Restore the online connection after changing the address. The new address is
active after downloading to the device.
DP address
The addresses of all devices on the bus must be unique. Each address can only be assigned
once to one device.
Note
Factory settings - address 126
• A device with factory settings has the address 126
• PROFIBUS address 126 is not a valid address.
• Downloading with PROFIBUS address 126 is not possible.
Change the address after prompting.
Setting range: 1 to 125.

Note
Changing the address with PROFIBUS connection
• Search for the device under online accesses with your PROFIBUS adapter
• Change PROFIBUS address 126 in the Parameter Editor
• Click on the button "Transfer online data to the hardware"
Otherwise:
• Go online with the SIMOCODE pro in the project
• Change address 126
• Click on the button "Transfer online data to the hardware".
Transmission rate
Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s are possible. The device automatically detects the baud rate on
PROFIBUS DP.

5.5 Motor protection
5.5.1 Motor protection introduction
Description
Topics and information on motor protection include:
● Overload protection (Page 174)
● Unbalance protection (Page 179)
● Blocking protection (Page 180)
● Thermistor protection (Page 181)
Schematic:
The following schematic shows the "Extended Protection" function block ("Overload
protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stalled rotor protection") with optional parameter
settings and events.
1)Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing transformers with

SIMOCODE pro V for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit above version *E03*

Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stalled rotor protection"
Response Prewarning level Trip level Level Level

"Overload protection" "Overload "Unbalance" "Stalled rotor
protection" protection"
Deactivation X X X X
Signaling X X X X
Warning X X X X
Tripping — X X X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s) — 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s) 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Note
Deactivate unbalance protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is set to single-
phase!
5.5.2 Overload protection
Description of overload protection

SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1
requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings, ranging from Class 5 to
Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the power-up behavior of the
motor, improving utilization of the motor capacity. Additionally, the "Thermal motor model"
and time to overload trip are calculated and made available to the control system. After an
overload trip, the remaining cooling down period can be displayed. The motor current is
saved in the case of an overload trip.
Depending on the control function, the set current Is is separately parameterizable for one or
two speeds (Is1 and Is2).
Set current Is1

The rated motor current is usually set with the set current Is1. This value can be found on the
rating plate of the motor. The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value.
Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring
module:
● 0.3 A to 3 A,
● 2.4 A to 3 A,
● 10 A to 100 A,
● 20 A to 25 A,
● 63 A to 630 A.

Transformation ratio active

Required when using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped
several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring
module.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option. The parameterized set current
corresponds here largely to the actual rated motor current and does not have to be
calculated. The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor
current [A] and the measured current [A] or any multiple of the ratio.
Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191.875.
Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox
activated. Range: 0 - 15.
Set current Is2

The set current Is2 is only required for motors with two speeds to guarantee the suitable
overload protection for the higher speed too. Generally, Is2 should be set higher than Is1.
Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module:
● 0.3 A to 3 A,
● 2.4 A to 3 A,
● 10 A to 100 A,
● 20 A to 25 A,
● 63 A to 630 A.

Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times
through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module, you can
enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option. The parameterized set current thus
continues to correspond to the actual rated motor current and does not have to be
converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor current [A] and
any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using SIMOCODE pro V basic unit above
version *E03*.
Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191.875.
Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox
activated. Range: 0 - 15.
Note
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set
for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers
is/are used for each speed.
Class
The Class (trip class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip from
cold at 7.2 times the set current Is (motor protection to IEC 60947). Please note that with
startups > "Class 10", the permissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced
(derated), i.e. you must select a larger contactor.
You can make the following settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40.

Response to overload
The SIMOCODE pro response to overload can be additionally adjusted here:
Note
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "Tripping"!
Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can
be reset. This is usually 5 minutes. When this cooling down period has elapsed, the thermal
memory (motor model) is deleted.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time extend the specified time
correspondingly.
You can make the following settings: 60 to 6553.5 s (default: 300 s).
Thermal motor model (thermal memory)

When the rated motor current (Is) is at 100%, the value of "Thermal motor model" is
87% (1/1.15 x 100%) in a steady state, and 100% at the moment of an overload trip.
"At operating temperature" state

In the "at operating temperature" state, the tripping times are reduced by the factors listed in
the table. These factors apply to 3-pole symmetrical loads, Class 5 to Class 40:
xIe Preload in [%] of the set current

0 20 40 60 80 100
1.15 1 1 1 1 1 1
1.5 1 0.90 0.78 0.64 0.57 0.24
2 1 0.88 0.74 0.58 0.40 0.19
4 1 0.85 0.69 0.52 0.35 0.16
6 1 0.84 0.68 0.51 0.34 0.15
7.2 1 0.84 0.68 0.51 0.33 0.15
8 1 0.84 0.67 0.51 0.33 0.15
Example:
You have operated and switched off a motor with set current 100% Is. You immediately
switch the motor back on. This causes an overload trip with 2 x Is, Class 10.
Tripping time in cold state: approximately 40 s (see tripping characteristic).
Factor for tripping time with preload 100% Is: 0.19 (in accordance with table).
Reduced tripping time: 0.18 x 40 s = 7.6 s.

Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when
tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this
interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible.
This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.
Note
Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically for this load!
You can make the following settings: 0 to 6553.5 s.
Load type
You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load.
● The internal ground-fault detection and unbalance protection must be deactivated.
You can make the following settings: 1-phase, 3-phase.
Delay prewarning
The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5 s) determines the amount of time that the prewarning
level (1.15 x Is) must be permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired
response. If no setting is made, there will be no response. In the event of a loss of phase or
an unbalance > 50%, the prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately 0.85 x Ie.
Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload + Unbalance" and
"Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically
● When the cooling down period has expired
● When the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified reset value.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged by a reset
signal:
● "Reset" button on the basic unit
● "Reset" button on the operator panel
● Standard function "Reset".
For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g.
using reset via bus.
You can make the following settings: Manual, Auto.

WARNING
Unexpected restart of the motor
The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an unexpected motor
restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.
5.5.3 Unbalance protection
Description
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system.
If a specified limit value is violated, a defined and delayable response can be initiated. If the
phase unbalance is larger than 50%, the tripping time is also automatically reduced in
accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the motors
increases in asymmetrical conditions.
The phase unbalance is calculated using the following equation:
Level
The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react is set here.
Level as follows:
Level: 100 % (40 %)
Response as follows:
Deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping
Delay as follows:
Setting range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)

5.5.4 Blocking protection
Description
If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current level), a
definable and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this case, for
example, the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection. The stalled
rotor protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed, e.g. for
Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads
as well as premature aging of the motor.
Exceeding the stalled rotor level

Level as follows:
Level: 0 – 1020% of Is
Note
Intermediate values are automatically rounded.
Response to exceeding the stalled rotor level

Delay of the stalled rotor level

The "Delay" parameter determines the amount of time that the stalled rotor level must be
permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting
is made, there will be no response.
Range: 0 – 25.5 s (0.5 s)

5.5.5 Thermistor protection
Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary
PTC thermistors which can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.
Thermistor protection is used for:
● Motors with high switching frequencies
● Converter operation
● Motors with heavy starting
● Intermittent duty and/or braking operation
● Hampered air infeed
● Speeds below the rated speed.
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearing of the motor.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the Thermistor logic module:
Figure 5-1 Thermistor (thermistor protection)
Response to overtemperature
Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the temperature has
overshot the trip level.
Signaling, warning, tripping
Note
Motors for EEx e applications
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!

Response to sensor fault

Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in the case of a short-circuit or a break in
the thermistor sensor cable.

5.6 Motor control
5.6 Motor control
5.6.1 Control stations
Description
Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The
"Control stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of
these different control stations.
SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different control stations.
Dependent on the set control function, up to five different control commands can be
transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.
Control stations:
● Local control (in the direct vicinity of the motor). Control commands via pushbuttons.
● PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote).
● PC or PC/OPC-UA [HMI], control commands are issued via an operator control station or
via PROFIBUS DPV1 or OPC-UA with the SIMOCODE ES software.
● Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel in the
switchgear cabinet door.
Examples of control commands:
● Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
● Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON>) for a reversing starter
● Motor SLOW (ON>), Motor FAST (ON>>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (e.g.
binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control
commands to take effect.
Up to five different control commands can come from each control station. Up to five plugs
(plug ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) are available on the function block for each control
station. The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct
starter, for example, only the plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.

5.6 Motor control
Control stations:
● Local:
In this case, the command devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor and are
wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block
must be connected to any sockets (normally the function blocks for the basic units or the
digital module inputs – BU inputs, DM inputs) for the control commands to take effect.
Note
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the
motor down safely if an open circuit occurs in the supply cable, for example. The
precondition is that the control station is active.
● PLC/PCS or PLC/PCS [PN]:

This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the automation
system (PLC/PCS) via the cyclic receive telegram of PROFIBUS DP.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets
(normally MIT Cyclic Receive) for the control commands to take effect.
● PC or PC/OPC-UA [HMI]
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an arbitrary PC that,
along with the automation system, is used as a second master on PROFIBUS DP or that,
as a client, accesses the data made available by SIMOCODE pro, as server, via OPC-
UA. The control commands are sent via the Acyclic receive telegram from PROFIBUS
DPV1 or are transferred using a client-server connection via OPC-UA.
Note
If the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take effect via
the "PC [DPV1]" or "PC/OPC-UA" control station. At the same time, the enabled
commands for this control station also take effect for SIMOCODE ES.
● Operator panel:
This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons on
the 3UF72 operator panel, which is mounted in a switchgear cabinet door, for example.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets
(normally to the function block for the buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the
control commands to take effect.
Note
must be used as a speed changeover button for control functions with two speeds and
two directions of rotation. For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal
control command "[OP]<>/<<>>".

5.6 Motor control
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, its control commands automatically take effect
via the "Operator panel [OP]" control station. At the same time, the enabled commands
for this control station also take effect for SIMOCODE ES.
5.6.2 Operating modes
Operating modes
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different
operating modes available for selection:
● Local 1
● Local 2
● Local 3
● Remote/Automatic: In this operating mode, the system must communicate via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g. local and
PLC/PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control
stations selectively. Four operating modes are provided for this purpose which can be
selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every
operating mode, you can define whether "ON commands" and/or "OFF commands" are to be
accepted. In multiplex mode, the operating modes are controlled in such a way that only one
operating mode is active at any one time.
Example: There are three operating modes in a system:
Operating mode Description

Keyswitch operation, e.g. Local 1 Only local control inputs are permitted! All other
control stations are disabled.
Manual operation, e.g. Local 3 Only operator panel control commands and local
control commands can be issued.
Remote operation, e.g. remote/automatic Only control commands from the PLC/PCS are
permitted.
The keyswitch must be read in via an input to select these operating modes. The remote
switching operation should be controlled via the bus. Keyswitch operation has priority over all
other operating modes.

5.6 Motor control
5.6.3 Mode selector
Mode selector
The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes "Local 1",
"Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic".
To do this, plugs S1 and S2 must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs,
The table below shows the operating modes depending on the signal states of mode
selectors S1 and S2:
Input Operating mode

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote/Automatic
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used to specify the
switch authorizations for the individual control stations
● Local control [LC]
● PLC/PCS [DP]
● PC [DPV1] or PC/OPC-UA [HMI]
● Operator panel (OP)
Only the following are active:
● The operating mode set by plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations" function block
and
● the enables selected there
5.6.4 Enables
Enables
for each control station in every operating mode.
This means, depending on the operating mode, you can define for every control station
whether the motor may be switched on only, off only, or on and off from the control station.
The corresponding checkbox ☑ is activated in the "Control stations" dialog in
SIMOCODE ES.

5.6 Motor control
5.6.5 Enables and enabled control command schematic
Enables and enabled control command schematic

Example for enabled commands:
The following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the "Local 2" operating
mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:
In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2" operating mode
via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic unit and the digital module.

5.6 Motor control
5.6.6 Control function
Description
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load
feeders.
They are characterized by the following important features:
● Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process
● Monitoring the ON/OFF status
● Tripping if a fault occurs.
SIMOCODE pro monitors these statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input,
which is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current
measuring modules.
All the necessary interlocks and logic operations for the respective applications are already
implemented in the control functions.
Control functions include:
● Plugs for control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually
connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets.
● Auxiliary control inputs (plugs), e.g. Feedback ON
● Sockets for
– Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.
– Displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS.
– Status, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>".
– Faults, e.g. "Fault - Feedback (FB) On", "Fault - Antivalence"
● Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.
● A logic component with all necessary interlocks and connections for the control function.
● Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is active "at a
higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor protection are
independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control function.

5.6 Motor control
Control function schematic

The schematic below shows the general representation of the control function
("Protection/Control" function block):
See also
5.6.7 Contactor controls
Description
The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control commands and
taking the specified control function into consideration, including all corresponding interlocks,
feedbacks, corresponding parameters and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the
QE contactor controls are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital
modules, and they switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE
contactor controls is directly dependent on the set control function.

5.6 Motor control
5.6.8 Lamp controls and status information
Description
The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL lamp controls.
They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control input "FB ON". The
number of usable lamp controls and status information is directly dependent on the specified
control function.
Feeder status feedback:
● Status information, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFIBUS DP to the automation system and signal the status of the feeder there.
● Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a signal lamp
or a pushbutton lamp for status display.
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the indicators show a different response (e.g.
flashing).
● The lamp controls "QL..." signal the following in addition to the status indicators:
- Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS flashes)
- Saved changeover command (lamp outputs QLE flicker)
- Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
● Additional (extended) status information:
- Start active: If "Motor" has been selected as the load type, this signal is present during
the start process of the motor for the duration of the specified class time (e.g. 10 s for
Class 10). Exceptions are the "Overload relay" and "Valve" control functions.
- Interlocking time running: For control functions with a change in the direction of rotation,
the signal remains present until the specified interlocking time has elapsed.
- Change-over pause running: For the "Dahlander", "Pole-changing starter" and "Star-
delta" control functions, the signal is present after changeover until the specified time has
elapsed.
● Additional (extended) status information for the control function "Positioner" or "Valve":
- Feedback Closed (FC)
- Feedback Open (FO)
- Torque Closed (TC)
- Torque Open (TO).
These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit switch and/or
torque switch. The amount of usable status information is directly dependent on the selected
control function.
● Additional (extended) fault messages for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control function:
- Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the corresponding limit
switch. The positioner may have stalled
- Double 0: Both torque switches have responded
- Double 1: Both limit switches have responded
- End position: Positioner has left the end position without receiving a control command
- Antivalence: The changeover contacts of the limit switches do not issue an antivalent
signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control function).

5.6 Motor control
5.6.9 Non-maintained command mode
Description
● Deactivated
The control command on the corresponding plug of the control stations "ON <, ON <<,
ON >, ON >>" is saved. It can only be revoked by an "OFF" control command from the
corresponding control station. An auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is not
required. Motor feeders are usually operated in locking mode. Locking is preset.
● Activated
Depending on the control function chosen, non-maintained command mode acts on the
plugs of all control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only
effective as long as there is a "high signal".
5.6.10 Saving change-over command
Description
● Deactivated
Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/speed to the other are only
implemented via a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over pause has
elapsed.
This setting is used under normal conditions and is the default setting.
● Activated
Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to
the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" once the interlocking time/change-
over pause has elapsed. If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately
due to a parameterized interlocking time/change-over pause, the selection is signaled by
flickering QLE displays. Your selection can be canceled at any time with "OFF".
5.6.11 DM-F LOCAL/DM-F PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function
Description
● Deactivated
Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also affects the SIMOCODE pro control
function, so that the contactor control is also always switched off.
This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the
motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
● Activated:
Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control
function, so that the contactor control is not switched off.
This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not affect the
motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

5.6 Motor control
5.6.12 Load type
Description
You can choose between
● Motor and
● Resistive load (e.g. heater):
Since overcurrent generally does not flow during startup on a resistive load, the "Start active"
status is not signaled. In this case, the start-up override does not occur for the "Signaling",
"Warning" and "Tripping" functions.
5.6.13 Feedback time
Description
SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via FB ON.
If the status of FB ON changes without a corresponding switching command, "Fault -
Feedback (FB)" switches off the feeder.
Default: 0.5 s.
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults" for a defined period of
time, e.g. in the case of network switches.
When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 0.
If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control command
being issued, a fault message "Fault - Feedback (FB) ON" is issued. The contactor controls
can only be re-connected after the fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 1. If no
current flows for longer than the set feedback time without the "OFF" control command being
issued, a fault message "Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The contactor controls are
deactivated.
5.6.14 Execution time
Description
SIMOCODE pro monitors the switch-on and switch-off process. The switch-on or switch-off
process must be completed within this time.
Default: 1.0 s.
After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be able to measure current
in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message
"Fault - execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor
controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to measure
any current in the main circuit after the execution time has elapsed. Otherwise, the fault
message
"Fault - Execution STOP cmmand" is issued.
The contactor controls can only be re-connected after the fault has been rectified.

5.6 Motor control
5.6.15 Interlocking time
Description
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time, in the case of
reversing starters, for example. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be
delayed via the interlocking time.
Default: 0 s.
5.6.16 Change-over pause
Description
In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter" control functions, switching from FAST to
SLOW can be delayed by the time configured.
In the "Star-delta starter" control function, the change-over pause extends the time between
switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.
Default: 0.00 s.
5.6.17 Max. star time
Description
With the control functions "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter":
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Max. star time: 0 - 255 s (default: 20 s)
5.6.18 Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable
Description
With the control functions "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter":
The set current and the change-over levels for star-delta switching depend on the installation
location of the current measuring module:
● In the delta circuit: Set current Is- is reduced to
Irated x 1/√3
In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor).

5.6 Motor control
5.6.19 Scope and application
Description
Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:
Control function SIMOCODE

pro C pro S pro V
Overload relay ● ● ●
Direct starter ● ● ●
Reversing starter ● ● ●
Circuit breaker ● ● ●
Star-delta starter — ● ●
Star-delta reversing starter — — ●
Dahlander — — ●
Dahlander reversing starter — — ●
Pole-changing starter — — ●
Pole-changing reversing starter — — ●
Valve — — ●
Positioner 1 to Positioner 5 — — ●
Soft starter — ● ●
Soft starter with reversing contactor — — ●

5.7 Machine monitoring
5.7.1 Ground fault

SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the
summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible fault current or ground fault.
See also
5.7.2 Internal ground-fault monitoring
Description
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring
modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either
grounded directly or with low impedance. You can activate internal ground-fault monitoring
by parameterization.
It covers two different operating conditions:
● Normal operation to 2x Is. The actual operating current must be less than twice the set
current Is. Fault currents of > 30% of the set current ls will be detected.
● Start-up or overload operation to 2x Is. The actual operating current is greater than twice
the set current Is. Fault currents of > 15% of the actual motor current will be detected.
NOTICE
False tripping in the case of internal ground-fault monitoring
False tripping can occur if you use internal ground-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits.
During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Ground fault monitoring" function block:
Defining the response to internal ground-fault monitoring

Delay as follows:
Setting range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, regardless of whether the motor is running
or not (operating state "ON").
5.7.3 External ground-fault monitoring
Description
External ground-fault monitoring via a summation current transformer/residual current
transformer and ground-fault module is normally used in the following cases:
● Where networks with high impedance are grounded
● Where precise measurement of the ground-fault current is necessary, e.g. for the purpose
of condition monitoring.
Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A can be evaluated with the 3UL22 summation
current transformer. The response delay of the summation current transformer is 300 ms -
500 ms. This response delay can be additionally delayed with the relevant parameterization
of SIMOCODE pro.
With the 3UL23 residual current transformer, it is possible to determine the precise fault
current as a measured value, and to define freely selectable warning and trip limits in a wide
range from 30 mA to 40 mA.

Principle of operation:
The main conductors and, if present, the neutral conductor to which the load is connected,
are routed through the opening of the 3UL23 residual current transformer. Its secondary
winding is connected to the ground-fault module. If an insulation fault occurs, for example, a
residual current is created between the inflowing and outflowing currents, and this is
evaluated by the ground-fault module.
Settings in the device configuration
Select here whether external ground-fault monitoring is to be used via a summation current
transformer and a ground-fault module.
If yes, select
● The 3UF7500 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL22 summation current
transformer) or
● The 3UF7510 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL23 residual current
transformer) or
● The multifunction module (only with SIMOCODE pro S basic unit in conjunction with the
3UL23 residual current transformer). The multifunction module can be used to add an
input to the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit to connect a 3UL23 residual current transformer.
Note
• The 3UL23 residual current transformer is suitable for detecting pure AC fault currents
and AC fault currents with a pulsating direct-current component
• Requirements for using a 3UF7510 ground-fault module:
Use of this ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, with at least
DANGER
No personnel protection or fire protection
The 3UF75* ground-fault modules monitor devices and systems for their correct function.
Use suitable and trained personnel for fire protection.
A definable and delayable response can be parameterized in the event a ground fault is
detected. A message is output if the ground fault limit is exceeded.
You can define additional trips by parameterization. If the rated fault currents are exceeded,
SIMOCODE pro V responds either
● by turning off the contactor controls QE, or
● by issuing a warning.

5.7.4 Current limits
Description
Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring independent of overload
protection.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for freely selectable
upper and lower current limit.
The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it reaches a
prewarning or trip level.
The motor current is measured using current measuring modules or current/voltage
measuring modules.
See also
5.7.5 Current limits I> (upper limit)
Trip level, warning level

When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), two different response levels, I> (upper limit)
trip level and I> (upper limit ) warning level, can be parameterized and monitored. If the
current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit monitoring
responds.
● Trip level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments
● Warning level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Current limits" function block:

Trip level activity, warning level

The trip level/warning level is active only when the motor is running, the start-up procedure
has been completed, and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).
Defining the response to trip level overshoot

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:
Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Defining the response to warning level overshoot

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Warning
Delay as follows:
Setting the hysteresis for current limits I> (upper limit)

Range: 0 to 15% of the level value in 1% increments (5% )
See also
5.7.6 Current limits I< (lower limit)

When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), two different response levels (trip
level/warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of the phases (Imax)
drops below the response level, the current limit monitor responds.
● Trip level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments
● Warning level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Current limits" function block:

Defining the response to trip level undershoot

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:
Defining the response to warning level undershoot

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:
Setting the hysteresis for current limits I> (lower limit)

See also

5.7.7 Voltage monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase
network or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE
pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules. This is based on
the minimum voltage of all voltages Umin.
Note
Please note that only phase voltages are available with SIMOCODE pro V basic units up to
version *E06*. If required, the line-to-line voltage can be calculated from the phase voltage
using the logic module "Calculator 1/2" as follows: Line-to-line voltage = phase voltage *
1.73.
From version *E07* onwards, either phase voltage or line-to-line voltage can be used as the
basis for monitoring.
Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can determine and
signal the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit
breaker or at the fuses in the main circuit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Voltage monitoring" function block:

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level). If the current of
one or more phases undershoots the response level or the warning level, voltage monitoring
responds.
● Trip level:
0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments
● Warning level:
0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments


Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take
effect:
● Always, except TPF (on+)
Trip level/warning level always effective, regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position
● If motor runs, except TPF (run)
Trip level/warning level only active if the motor is ON and not in the test position
● Always (on)1)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill
1)When using the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit (product version *E03* and higher) with a
current/voltage measuring module
Defining the response to trip level undershoot

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:
Defining the response to warning level undershoot

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Warning
Delay as follows:
Setting the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Voltage measurement - Load type for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can specify whether 1-phase or 3-phase loads are to be displayed.

5.7.8 Cos phi monitoring

Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of
application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly. If the set trip level or warning level is undershot, a signal is generated
or the motor is switched off, depending upon the setting.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cos phi monitoring" function block:

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level) for cos phi
monitoring.
● Trip level: 0 to 100%
● Warning level: 0 to 100%

Defining the response to undershooting the set trip level

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:
Defining the response to undershooting the set warning level

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Warning
Delay as follows:

5.7.9 Active power monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power.
For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump motor, conclusions can be drawn
from the active power level about the flow rate or fluid fill levels.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the active power for freely selectable
upper and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured
and delayed if it reaches a prewarning or trip level.
Active power measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Active power monitoring" function block:

With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip
level/warning level) for the upper and lower limits:
Trip level:
● P> (upper limit) 0 to 4294967.295 kW
● P < (lower limit)
Warning level:
● P> (upper limit) 0 to 4294967.295 kW
● P < (lower limit)


Response to trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:
Response to warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:
5.7.10 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer
(standardized 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0 / 4 -
20 mA (AM1) monitoring" function block via the analog module.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "0 / 4 - 20 mA (AM1) monitoring" function block:


With 0/4 - 20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip
level/warning level) for the upper and lower limits:
Trip level:
● 0 / 4 - 20> (upper limit), 0 to 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)
● 0 / 4 - 20< (lower limit)
Warning level:
● 0 / 4 - 20> (upper limit), 0 to 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)
● 0 / 4 - 20< (lower limit)

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take
effect:
● always (on)
trip level/warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill
● always, except in the case of TPF (on+);
trip level/warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill;
exception: "TPF", that is, motor feeder is in test position
● if motor is running, except TPF (run)
trip level/warning level only active if the motor is ON and not in the test position.
● If the motor is running, except TPF, with startup override (run+)
Trip level/warning level is only active if the motor is running, the startup procedure has
been completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected.
Response to trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> (upper limit), 0 / 4 - 20 mA < (lower limit)

● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Tripping
Delay as follows:

Response to warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> (upper limit), 0 / 4 - 20 mA < (lower limit)

● Deactivated
● Signaling,
● Warning
Delay as follows:
Marking
The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the Faults/Warnings
online dialog. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 - 20 mA>"; range:
maximum 10 characters
Hysteresis for 0 / 4 - 20 mA
Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:
Hysteresis for the analog signal: 0 to 15% in 1% increments (5% )
Note
Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module can be done, for
example, by free limit monitors.
5.7.11 Hysteresis 0 / 4 - 20 mA
Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:
Hysteresis for the analog signal: 0 to 15% of the level value in 1% increments (5% ).
5.7.12 Operation monitoring
Description
When an adjustable limit is violated, a message or alarm can be generated which can
indicate that the corresponding motor must be serviced or replaced. After the motor has
been replaced, the operating hours and stop times can be reset, for example.

To avoid excessive thermal loads and premature wear of the motor, it is possible to limit the
number of motor startups for a specifiable period. The number of still possible starts is
available in the SIMOCODE pro for further processing.
The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by prewarnings.
Note
Operating hours, stop times and the number of motor starts can be monitored completely in
the device and/or transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operation monitoring":
Response
Response Operating hours Stop time monitoring - Number of starts Number of

monitoring level level overshoot starts
prewarning
Deactivated X X X X
Signaling X X X X
Warning X X X X
Tripping -- -- X --
See also

5.7.13 Operating hours monitoring

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a
motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time.
Level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring function responds.
Level: 0 - 1193046 hours
Activity
Response
You can define the response to overshoot here.
See also
5.7.14 Stop time monitoring

System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B drives). Ensure that
these are always operated alternately. This prevents long stop times and reduces the risk of
non-availability.
The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to generate an alarm, thus
initiating connection of the motor.
Level
The length of the permissible stop time is stipulated here; if exceeded, the monitoring
function responds.
Level: 0 - 65535 hours
Activity

Response
You can define the response to overshoot of the permissible stop time here.
See also
5.7.15 Number of starts monitoring motor

Monitoring the number of motor starts can protect system parts (motor and switching devices
such as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable
time frame and thus prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual
control.
Schematic
The schematic below illustrates the principle of monitoring the number of starts:
Permissible starts
The maximum permissible number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range for
starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last permissible start has
been executed, the "Just one start possible" prewarning is generated.
Permissible starts: 1 to 255
Time range for starts

The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum number of starts is
only available again after the parameterized time range for starts has elapsed. The number
of available starts is shown by the analog value "Permissible starts - actual value".
Time range for starts: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
Activity

Response to overshoot
You can define the response to overshoot of the number of starts within the time range for
starts here.
Response to prewarning
You can define the response after the penultimate start here.
Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the last permissible
start, this new start command will no longer be executed if the setting "Response to
overshoot - tripping" has been set. "Fault - No. of starts >" is generated and the set
interlocking time activated.
Interlocking time: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
See also
5.7.16 Temperature monitoring (analog)
Description
Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings, coolant and
gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog temperature sensors such as
NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for
overtemperature: Separate levels for warning and tripping temperature can be set.
Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all the sensor
measuring circuits of the temperature module.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Temperature monitoring" function block (TM1):

Settings for temperature trip level T>

● Range: - 273 °C to 65262 °C
● Response to trip level T>
Defining the response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table
"Response")
● Marking for trip level T>
No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>";
range: Maximum. 10 characters
Settings for temperature warning level T>

● Range: - 273 °C to 65262 °C
● Response to warning level T>
Defining the response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table
"Response")
● Marking for warning level T>
No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>";
range: Maximum 10 characters
● Hysteresis
0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments (5 °C)
Trip level activity/warning level

The trip level/warning level is always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or
not (operating state "ON").
Response to overshoot of the trip level/warning level for the temperature

Response to trip level T> as follows:
● Signaling
● Tripping
Response to warning level T> as follows:
● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Warning
Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response to a sensor fault
must be set in the "Temperature module inputs (TM1/2 inputs)" function block if temperature
monitoring is used.

Note
To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently, a suitable
number of free limit monitors can be connected to the "Temperature module inputs (TM1/2
inputs)" function block and differing limits set for the individual temperature sensors, instead
of the "Temperature monitoring" function block.
5.7.17 Hysteresis for temperature
Setting the temperature

Here you can set the fluctuation range for the temperature:
Hysteresis for temperature: 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments (5 °C).
5.7.18 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Description
Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling
circuit (actuator tripping). Each time the enabling circuit is closed, the monitoring time starts
again.
This function supports you in complying with test intervals that require verification.
In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay contacts perform
safety-related tripping. You can only determine whether or not the relay contacts of the
enabling circuit actually open by changing the switching state of the contacts.
The function "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" supports plant operators in
monitoring the time that has elapsed since the enabling circuit was last switched in. When
the set limit is reached, the set response is triggered (deactivated, signaling, warning; see
response). This is logged in the event memory.
This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the system operator in
detecting faults by carrying out regular tests, see information in the operating instructions on
regularly testing the function of a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be
safety-related.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function block:
Response to monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Defining the response when the set limit is reached:
● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Warning
Test interval:
Adjustable limit for the interval for mandatory testing: 0 to 255 weeks.

5.8 Inputs
5.8 Inputs
5.8.1 Inputs
Acyclic receive (Page 226)
5.8.2 Basic unit inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU inputs" function block with four binary inputs connected to
common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting
the sockets of the "BU inputs" function blocks.
The "BU inputs" function block consists of:
● Input terminals located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to the sockets "BU
input 1" to "BU input 4"
● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control
stations" function block
● A socket for the "TEST/RESET" button
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally dependent upon the operating
state of the device:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for executing device tests.
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST/RESET" button (e.g.
operation of the memory module and the addressing plug).
One BU inputs function block is provided.

5.8 Inputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU inputs" function block:
Application examples
You can wire the start and stop buttons of the local control station, for example, to the inputs.
These can then be assigned to the "Local control stations" function block. If assigned
accordingly, the input signals also can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such
as "RESET" or "External fault".
Basic unit settings

● Delay for inputs
You can set a delay time for the inputs, if required.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
5.8.3 Operator panel buttons
Description
The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 as well as the "TEST/RESET" button.
Correspondingly, the "OP buttons" function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five
sockets.
Note
The "OP buttons" function blocks can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected
and configured in the device configuration!

5.8 Inputs
Note
The operator panel with display does not have a TEST/RESET button. The allocated
functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys. Similarly, the
corresponding status signal will then be available at the "OP test/RESET button" socket.
● Buttons 1 to 4, operator panel:

Buttons 1 to 4 are usually intended for input of control commands for the motor feeder.
Control commands can be, for example:
– Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
– Motor LEFT (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing starter
– Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.
– However, buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned control
commands, and can be assigned to other functions via different internal connection of
the respective function block socket in SIMOCODE pro.
● "TEST/RESET" button, Operator panel:
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally assigned to fixed functions:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for carrying out device plugs
– Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug.
– Nevertheless, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button is picked off at the
corresponding socket of the function block and assigned to further functions in
SIMOCODE pro.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP buttons" function block:

5.8 Inputs
5.8.4 Digital module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM inputs" function blocks, each with 4 binary inputs connected to
common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting
the sockets of the "DM inputs" function blocks.
Note
"DM inputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are
connected and configured in the device configuration!
Note
When using DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules, the input signals are
available as non-safety-related information.
Each "DM inputs" function block consists of:

● Input terminals located on the outside of the digital module, corresponding to the sockets
"DM input 1" to "DM input 4"
● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control
stations" function block.
The following are available:
● 1 DM1 inputs function block on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit1)
● 1 DM1 inputs function block and 1 DM2 inputs function block on the SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit.
Note
1)For the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the DM1 inputs and the temperature input are
located on the multifunction module.

5.8 Inputs
Schematic (1)
The following schematic shows the "DM1/DM2 inputs" function blocks:
Schematic (2)
The following schematic shows the "DM1 inputs" function block as a DM-F Local fail-safe
digital module:
Meaning of the inputs:

Input: 1 - "tripped" state
Start: Start input state (Y33)
Feedback: Feedback circuit state (Y34): 1 - closed; 0 - open
Cascade: Cascade input state (1)
Sensor 1: Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12)
Sensor 2: Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22).

5.8 Inputs
Schematic (3)
The following schematic shows the "DM1 inputs" function block as a DM-F PROFIsafe fail-
safe digital module:
Meaning of the inputs:

Input 1: State of IN1 (83)
Input 4: Feedback circuit state FBC (91): 1 - closed; 0 - open
Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on basic unit 2 to be
increased in increments. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve
binary inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned accordingly, the input signals can be also
used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External fault".

5.8 Inputs
Digital module settings

● Delay for inputs
You can set a delay for the inputs, if required.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms.
These values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. The values are
approximately 40 ms higher for digital modules with input supplies of 110 to 240 V
AC/DC.
NOTICE
Delays
Delays for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable"
If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the delay cannot be set.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delays are set using the DIP switch of the DM-F
Local on the front.
5.8.5 Temperature module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM1 inputs" function block with three analog sockets corresponding
to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module. The temperature of the
three measuring circuits (K) can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An
additional analog socket always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured
temperatures.
Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block represent the status of the sensor
measuring circuits. The temperatures can be processed internally and/or transmitted
cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic send" function blocks.
Note
The "TM1 inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding temperature module
TM1 is connected and configured in the device configuration!

5.8 Inputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM1 inputs" function block:
Note
Wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or two 3-wire temperature sensors.
Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:
● Motor windings
● Motor bearings
● Motor coolant temperature
● Motor gearbox oil temperature
The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can also be monitored
independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.

5.8 Inputs
Temperature module settings

● Sensor type:
– PT100
– PT1000
– KTY83
– KTY84
– NTC
● Response to sensor fault/out of range as follows:
– Deactivated
– Signaling
– Warning
– Tripping
● Number of active sensors:
– 1 sensor
– 2 sensors
– 3 sensors
5.8.6 Analog module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "AM1 inputs" function block with two analog sockets, corresponding
to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective analog value of each input can
be read from these sockets and processed internally.
An additional binary socket of the function block also represents the status of the analog
measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed internally and/or transmitted
cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic send" function blocks.
Note
The "AM1 inputs" function block can only be used if the analog module AM1 is connected

5.8 Inputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1 inputs" function block:
Typical applications are, for example:
● Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
● Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer
Analog module settings

● Input signal
– 0 - 20 mA
– 4 - 20 mA
● Response to open circuit
– Signaling
– Warning
– Tripping
● Active inputs
– 1 input
– 2 inputs
Note
The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.

5.8 Inputs
Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit,
each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If
the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used
as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and
the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this.
Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.
5.8.7 Cyclic receive
Description
With the "Cyclic receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data from the
automation system will be further processed via PROFIBUS DP in SIMOCODE pro. These
will normally be PLC/PCS binary control commands. Connection with the "Control stations"
function block in SIMOCODE pro will allow the motor to be controlled via PROFIBUS DP.
Direct connection of the analog value with the "AM output" function block will result in, for
example, the cyclic output of the value sent via PROFIBUS DP at the output of the analog
module.
The "Cyclic receive" function blocks consist of:
● Eight bits each (= 2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● Two words (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable)
A total of three "Cyclic receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3) are provided.

5.8 Inputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic receive" function blocks:
Cyclic services
PROFIBUS DP:
The cyclic data is exchanged between DP master and DP slave in every DP cycle. The DP
master sends the cyclic receive data (Cyclic receive) to SIMOCODE pro each time.
SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the cyclic send data (Cyclic send) to the DP master.
5.8.8 Acyclic receive
Description
In addition to "Cyclic receive", it is possible to transfer further data acyclically to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.
With the "Acyclic receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic information from
PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in SIMOCODE pro. For this, you only have to
connect the sockets of the "Acyclic receive" function blocks to any other function blocks in
SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic receive" function blocks consist of:
● Eight bits each (= 2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● One word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable)
● One input each from PROFIBUS DP
Overall there are three "Acyclic receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).

5.8 Inputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic receive" function blocks:
Acyclic services
Acyclic services will only be transferred on request. The information (4 bytes) can be found
in data set 202. This data set can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated every time the data
set is received. The content of the data set is deleted after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.

With the "Analog value recording" function block, you record any analog values
(2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro. The recording time period can be adjusted.
SIMOCODE must be online for analog value recording.
● Establish the online connection via the LifeList.
Alternatively, click on "Connect Online" in the project.
● During commissioning, open the section "Analog value recording".
Functions of analog value recording:
1. Upload values
Upload the 60 recorded values and show values as graphics.
2. Save
Save and export the 60 values as a csv file.
3. "Trigger event occurred"
After the trigger event defined in the parameters has occurred, the display shows a green
light. After the trigger event, 60 values are recorded again.
4. Graphical representation
The 60 recorded values are shown in a diagram.

5.8 Inputs
The recording is made direct in SIMOCODE pro, related to the motor feeder, and
independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system.
Each value present at the analog output "assigned analog value" is recorded and saved.
Recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/negative) via any binary signal at the
trigger input of the function block. Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The
time frame of the recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate [s] x 60 values

The pre-trigger is used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence before
the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the total sampling time.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog value monitoring (record)" function block:
Signal/value settings
● Trigger input
Start of analog value recording with any signal (any outputs, e.g. device inputs, current
flowing)
● Assigned analog value
Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro
● Trigger edge
Positive/negative
● Sampling rate
0.1 to 50 seconds in 0.1 s increments
● Pre trigger
0 to 100% in 5 % increments

5.8 Inputs
Description
Activate 3UF50 compatibility mode if a SIMOCODE DP device is to be used by a
SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration. If 3UF50 compatibility mode is
activated, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with a 3UF50 configuration. In this
case, from the point of view of the PLC (master class 1) communication with SIMOCODE pro
is the same as communication with SIMOCODE DP. SIMOCODE DP supports cyclic
communication (basic types 1-3), diagnosis, as well as DPV1 data sets (DS 130, DS 131,
DS 133).
3UF50 operating mode

You can specify here whether SIMOCODE pro V is to be operated on PROFIBUS DP with
DPV0 functions (standard) or DPV1 functions (including acyclic services and interrupts)
Win SIMOCODE DP converter

In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE DP to be integrated into
the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device parameters must be adjusted
accordingly. The "Win SIMOCODE DP Converter" software supports you in this process.
This software enables you to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win
SIMOCODE DP into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).
3UF50 basic type

You can set here the basic type (1, 2, or 3) used to configure the 3UF50.
Safety notices
Note
Communication with a DP master (class 2 master), e.g. with the Win SIMOCODE DP
Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Note
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the startup parameter block is always set, i.e. the
transmission of the device parameters created using the SIMOCODE DP GSD or
SIMOCODE DP cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V.

5.8 Inputs
Note
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE DP projects in which SIMOCODE DP
is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the SIMOCODE DP.

5.9 Outputs
5.9 Outputs
5.9.1 Basic unit
Description
In this dialog you can connect the three inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the
appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU outputs" function block with two or three relay outputs. You can,
for example, switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of
the function block must be connected to the respective sockets (usually the QE. contactor
controls of the control function).
The "BU outputs" function block consists of:
● Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
● Three relays
● Output terminals
One "BU outputs" function block is available for the SIMOCODE pro C, pro S and pro V
basic units.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU outputs" function block on the SIMOCODE pro C,
pro S and pro V basic units:

5.9 Outputs
The following schematic shows the "BU outputs" function block on the SIMOCODE pro S
basic unit:
● Activation of the main contactor in the motor feeder:
You can, for example, define which relay output is used for controlling the motor
contactor in the motor feeder. To do this, connect the desired relay output to the
respective "QE." contactor control of the control function.
● Activation of lamps for displaying operating states: You can, for example, define the relay
outputs via which lamps/LEDs are to be displayed (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this
purpose, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding contactor control "QE..."
of the control function. These are provided specially for controlling lamps and LEDs.
In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls automatically signal the following
using a 2-Hz flashing frequency:
● Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
● Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing.)
● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs
● Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or QL outputs.
BU outputs settings
● Output 1 to 3
Activation of the "BU outputs" function block via any signal (any sockets, e.g. device
inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc., usually from the QE contactor controls).

5.9 Outputs
5.9.2 Operator panel LED
Description
In this dialog, you can connect each of the seven inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so,
choose the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven freely usable
LEDs. The LEDs are located in the operator panel and can be used for any status displays.
For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function block must be connected to the
respective sockets (e.g. to the sockets for the status information of the control function).
Note
The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and
configured in the device configuration!
The "OP LED" function block consists of:

● Four plugs, "OP LED green 1" to "OP LED green 4", corresponding to the green LEDs.
The green LEDs are assigned visually/mechanically to the buttons on the operator panel.
They normally display feedback concerning the motor operating state.
● Three plugs, "OP LED yellow 1" to "OP LED yellow 3", corresponding to the yellow LEDs
● Four green LEDs
● Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).
One "OP LED" function block is provided for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:

5.9 Outputs
● Display of operating states:
You can, for example, define which LEDs are to be controlled to display the operating
states of the motor (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...)
For this purpose, connect the desired LED with the corresponding lamp control "QL." of
the control function.
In many cases, the LEDs are connected with the QL outputs.
● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow
LEDs.
Operator panel LED settings

In this dialog, you can connect each of the seven inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so,
choose the appropriate socket ☑ in the scroll boxes.
● Green 1 to green 4
Activation of the "OP LED" function block with any signal (any sockets, e.g. "motor"
operating state feedback)
● Yellow 1 to yellow 3
Activation of the "OP LED" function block with any signal (any sockets, e.g. displays for
status, events, faults)
5.9.3 Digital module
Description
In this dialog, you can connect each of the two inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose
the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks, which are each
equipped with two relay outputs. You can, for example, switch contactors or lamps via these
relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "DM outputs" function blocks must be
connected to the respective sockets (e.g. of the control function).
Note
"DM outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are
connected and configured in the device configuration!
Each function block has:

● Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2
● Two relays
● Output terminals.

5.9 Outputs

● One "DM1 outputs" function block on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit 1)
● Two "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks on the SIMOCODE pro V basic
unit.
Note
1)
For the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the DM1 outputs are located on the multifunction
module.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM1 outputs" / "DM2 outputs" function blocks:
● Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder
You can, for example, define which relay output is used for controlling the main contactor
in the motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE" contactor control of the
control function.
● Controlling lamps for displaying operating states:
You can, for example, define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...).
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp control of the
control function.
● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
"DM1/DM2 outputs" settings

● Output 1 to 2
Activation of the "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks via any signal (any
socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc., usually from the QE contactor
controls).

5.9 Outputs
5.9.4 Analog module
Description
Analog module 1 allows you to expand basic unit 3 by one analog output. The corresponding
"AM1 output" function block allows every analog value (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to
be output as a 0 / 4 - 20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. By
activating the function block via the "Assigned analog output value" plug with any integer
value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA will be sent to the
output terminals of the analog module.
Note
The "AM1 output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM) is connected
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1 output" function block:
● Assigned analog output value
● Output signal
0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA
● Start value of value range
0 to 65535
● End value of value range
0 to 65535
Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input
circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in
series. If the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can
also be used as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of
value range" and the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be
set to 65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the
analog module output.

5.9 Outputs
1) Output of the effective motor current - across the entire motor current range
The motor current of a motor is within the range 0 to 8 A.
The rated current IN of the motor at rated load is 2 A.
The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). The effective
phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) are
represented in SIMOCODE pro in accordance with the selected range as a percentage of
the parameterized set current Is:
● 0 A motor current corresponds to 0% of Is
● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%
As a result,
● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
● 0% motor current: 0 mA at the analog module output
2) Output of the effective motor current - only part of the motor current range (overload range)
The motor current of a motor is within the range 0 to 8 A.
The rated current IN of the motor at rated load is 2 A.
The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN
(2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be displayed on an instrument via
the analog module output.
The effective phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current
I_max) are represented in SIMOCODE pro in accordance with the selected range as a
percentage of the parameterized set current Is
● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%
As a result,
● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 100.
● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.

5.9 Outputs

3) Output of any analog value from the automation system (cyclically via PROFIBUS)
One word (2 bytes) can be transmitted cyclically from the automation system to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS. Any value can be output as a 0 / 4 - 20 mA signal by
directly connecting this cyclic receive word from PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If
the transmitted value is in S7 format (0 to 27648) this must be taken into consideration when
parameterizing.
As a result,
● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 27648.
● 0: 0 mA at the analog module output
5.9.5 Cyclic send data
Description
In this dialog, you can connect each of the inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the
The "Cyclic send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred
cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
"Cyclic send" function blocks consist of
● Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● Nine words (= 18 bytes, bytes 2 to 19 for nine analog values, freely parameterizable)
● One output to PROFIBUS DP each
Overall there are four "Cyclic send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3, 2/9).

5.9 Outputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic send" function blocks:
Cyclic PROFIBUS DP services

Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and the DP slave once in every DP
cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response,
SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.
Cyclic send data settings

● Byte 0 to 1; bit 0 to bit 7; basic types 1*, 2
Activation of bits by any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, send data, etc.)
● Byte 2/3; basic types 1*, 2
Activation of 1 word (2 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets, e.g., maximum current
Imax, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)
● Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9; basic type 1
Activation of 3 words (6 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets)
*) For basic unit 2 only
Byte 0 of the send data is already preset; byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current Imax!

5.9 Outputs
Cyclic send data settings

● Byte 0 to 1; bit 0 to bit 7; basic types 1*, 2, 3**
Activation of bits by any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, send data, etc.)
● Byte 2/3, basic types 1*, 2, 3**
Activation of 1 word (2 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets, e.g., maximum current
Imax, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)
● Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9; basic type 1*
● Byte 10/11, 12/13, 14/15, 16/17, 18/19, basic type 3**
*) For basic unit 2 only
**) For basic unit 3 only
Byte 0 of the send data is already preset; byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current Imax!
5.9.6 Acyclic send data
Description
In this dialog, you can connect each of the inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the
In addition to "Cyclic send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bits of binary information
to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.
The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred
acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The inputs (plugs) of the function
blocks must be connected to the respective sockets.
"Acyclic send" function blocks consist of
● Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● One output to PROFIBUS DP each.
A total of 2 "Acyclic send" function blocks are available for the SIMOCODE pro C,
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units.

5.9 Outputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic send" function blocks:
Acyclic services
Acyclic send data will only be transferred on request. The information (two bytes) can be
found in data set 203. This data set can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports
the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Acyclic send data settings

● Byte 0 - 1, bit 0 - 7
Activation of bits by any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, send data, status
information, events, etc.)

5.10 Standard functions
5.10.1 Test/Reset
Test/Reset description
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit or operator panel is generally
dependent upon the operating state of the device:
● Reset function: If a fault occurs
● Test function: In other operating states.
In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test/Reset tripping
via the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block consists of one plug.
A total of two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2," are provided, each function block having
a slightly different function:
● Test 1: Tests/trips of the output relays
● Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function block of a standard
function:

Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the "TEST/RESET" function
blocks:
Testing
Testing can be carried out as follows:
● Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
● Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks
● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model of the
overload function, i.e. after switching off via test, the system can be shut down immediately.
Tripping only occurs for the "Test 1" function block when the operating mode is set to
"Remote".
Reset function
Resetting can be carried out as follows:
● Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
● Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the internal
function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".
● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.
A total of three function blocks, Reset 1 to 3, are available All reset inputs (sockets) are
equal (OR function).

Test function
A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function.
The test function comprises the following steps:
● Lamp/LED test (test function activated for < 2 s)
● Test of the device functionality (test function activated for 2 s - 5 s)
● For "Test 1" function block only: Switching off the QE (test function activated > 5 s).
Settings for test 1 to 2

● Input
Activation of the "Test" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs,
● Test/Reset buttons disabled
The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are usually
intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying out a device test.
The buttons can be disabled by means of "Test/Reset keys disabled". These can then be
used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, blocking is carried out via
the corresponding menu function (default: not blocked)
Acknowledgment of faults
Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
● Faults can only be acknowledged
– if the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– if there is no "ON" control command pending.
● A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated and/or if an
"ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved depending on the type of fault.
Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the
operator panel. The LED changes from flashing to continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of faults

Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
● A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user has
previously acknowledged the fault)
● Auto reset of an overload trip or thermistor trip if motor protection reset = Auto (an
automatic acknowledgment is issued here after expiry of the cooling down period). The
motor cannot start immediately since reset cannot be performed when an ON command
is pending.
● If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.
However, a configuration error will be generated (exception: operator panel, if
parameterized accordingly).
● If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parameterization), all
related faults are acknowledged automatically.

● If a parameter of a function is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", or to "Signaling" or

"Deactivated".
● For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto reset".
Settings for reset 1 to 3

● Input
Activation of the "Reset" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs,
● Test/Reset buttons disabled
The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are usually
intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying out a device test.
The buttons can be disabled by means of "Test/Reset keys disabled". These can then be
used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, blocking is carried out via
the corresponding menu function (default: not blocked).
5.10.2 Test position feedback (TPF)
Description
You can carry out the "Cold run" function test using the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)"
function block. For this purpose, the function block input (plug) must be connected to the
respective socket. The active test position is signaled by flashing QL of the control function.
The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block comprises:
● One plug
● One "Status - test position" socket. The output is set if a signal is pending at the input.
● One "Fault - test position feedback error" socket. The output is set when
– "TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit
– "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.
In total, one "Test Position Feedback" function block is available.
In this dialog, you can:
● Connect the input (plug) with a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket in the
scroll boxes.
● Select the input logic (NO/NC contact) under "Type".
Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control function are
activated to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a flashing button LED, for
example.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:
Cold run
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network.
However, the control voltage is connected.
The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor
feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
To enable this function to be differentiated from normal operation, it must be activated via the
socket on the function block.
The feedback that the motor feeder is disconnected from the line voltage on the primary
current side can be made, for example, via an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the
motor feeder, wired to any device input (terminal). This is then internally connected to the
"Test Position Feedback (TPF) - input" plug of the function block.
When using current/voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely
unnecessary. The "TPF" function block can be activated here by monitoring for undervoltage
("Voltage monitoring" function block).
"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement
Note
"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:
• "TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder
• "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.
Acknowledge with "Reset".

Test position feedback (TPF) settings

● Input
Activation of the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block by any signal (any
sockets, e.g. device input)
● Type
Specification of the input logic
– NO contact (1-active)
– NC contact (0-active)
5.10.3 External fault
Description
The "External fault 1 to 4" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or
external devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor. To
do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External fault" function blocks must be connected to any
sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits, etc.). External faults can also be marked in
SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual malfunction.
Example: monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external speed monitor.
The "External fault" function block consists of:
● Two plugs (one plug for setting, one plug for resetting)
● One "Event - external fault" socket. The output is set if a signal is pending at the input.
● Four "External faults 1 to 4" function blocks for the SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro S basic units
● Six "External faults 1 to 6" function blocks for the SIMOCODE pro V basic units.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External fault" function blocks:
Special reset options

Test/Reset buttons, OFF command reset).
Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated (see "Settings").
External fault 1 to 6 settings

● Input
Activation of the "External fault" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets, e.g.
device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
● Type
Specification of the input logic:

● Activity
Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be evaluated:
– Always::
Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill.
– Only if motor is ON: Evaluation only if motor is switched ON
● Response
Specification of the response to an external fault when activated via the input (see the
"Response" table)
● Reset
Acknowledge the "External fault" fault by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
● Reset also by
Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using additional reset types:
– Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the
operator panel with display, via the menu (panel reset)
– Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset" command
– Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of
the activation signal)
– OFF command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault
● Marking
No parameter. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Rotational speed ", e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Range: maximum 10 characters.
"External fault" response

● Fault/tripping
● Warning
● Signaling

5.10.4 Operational protection OFF (OPO)
Description
The "Operational Protection OFF" (OPO) function block returns the positioner to a safe
position. To do this, the input (plug) must be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs,
The "Operational Protection OFF" function block consists of:
● One plug
● One "Status - OPO" socket. The output is set if a signal is pending at the input.
● One "Fault - OPO Fault" socket. The output is set when the respective, safe end position
has been reached.
Overall, there is one "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block for the SIMOCODE
pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block:
Operational protection OFF (OPO) settings

● Input
Activation of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block by the monitored signal (any
sockets, e.g. device inputs, etc.)
● Positioner response
Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function when activated via the
input:
– CLOSED: Positioner moves in "CLOSED" direction
– OPEN: Positioner moves in "OPEN" direction
● Type
Specification of the input logic

Safety notices
Note
A "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault message is not generated if the "OPO"
command attempts to run the positioner to the end position if it is approaching or has already
reached this end position.
Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried out while
"Operational protection OFF (OPO)" is active.
Note
The "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault message must be acknowledged by
the open or closed control commands, depending on the present "OPO" end position.
Note
Acknowledgment is performed even if the desired end position has not yet been reached.
Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
Response to other control functions

For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated between for OPO:
● Motor is on:
The motor is switched off with a "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault.
● Motor is off:
Initially no fault. "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" only occurs when an "ON
command" is issued.
5.10.5 Power failure monitoring (UVO)
Description
The "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is carried
out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary inputs
of SIMOCODE pro.
Overall, there is one "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block for the
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block:
Power failure monitoring (UVO) settings

● Input
Activation of the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block by the monitored signal
(any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
● Type
– Deactivated
– No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is
maintained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a
separate voltage relay.
● Power failure time
If the line voltage is restored within the power failure time, all drives which were running
If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain
disconnected and the "Fault - power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line
Range:
0 to 25.5 s in 0.1 s increments
26 to 255 s in 1 s increments
256 to 2550 s in 10 s increments
● Restart time delay (staggered)
You can set a restart time delay so that not all motors restart simultaneously (the line
voltage would otherwise break down again).
Range: 0 to 255 seconds.
● Activation of external power failure monitoring
Activation of the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block with the monitored
signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

5.10.6 Emergency start
Description
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated.
This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be
used to
● Enable an immediate reset and restart after an overload trip
● Delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.
CAUTION
Thermal overload
If emergency starts are performed too frequently this may result in thermal overloading
of the motor!
An emergency start is carried out as follows:

● Using the plug of the function block. To do this, the input (plug) must be connected to any
socket (e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
The "Emergency start" function block consists of:
● One plug
● One "Status - emergency start executed" socket. The output is set when an emergency
start has been executed.
Overall, there is one "Emergency start" function block available.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency start" function block:
Emergency start settings

● Input
Activation of the "Emergency start" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device
inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

5.10.7 Safety-related tripping
Safety-related tripping
Note
Please note that the information made available for further processing is in the form of non-
safety-related signals.
Note
Please note that the "Safety-related tripping" function block is not itself a safety-related
tripping function.
The DM-F Local safety function is determined solely by the DIP switch settings on the
module.
The DM-F PROFIsafe safety function is implemented by the fail-safe program in the F-CPU.
Overall, there is one "Safety-related tripping" function block for SAFETY (Local) or
PROFIsafe for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
DM-F Local schematic

The DM-F Local "Safety-related tripping" function block consists of three sockets:
● Event - DM-F LOCAL o.k.: The DM-F Local is ready for operation.
● Event - "Safety-related tripping": Safety-related tripping has been carried out.
● Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
The following schematic shows the "Safety-related tripping" function block and the setting of
the DIP switches, DM-F Local:
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Safety-related tripping" function block:

Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
Note
DIP switches target setting
The target setting of the DIP switches in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (can be made
using the mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit on download but does not affect the
function of the
DM-F Local.
The desired function is thus saved as soon as the parameterization has been created.
You must set the effective parameterization via the DIP switches on the front of the
DM-F Local (see tables below and/or the manual "Fail-safe digital modules SIMOCODE pro
Safety Solutions").
The basic unit compares the target setting (from the download) with the actual setting on the
DM-F Local. If these differ "Configuration deviation" is output!
DM-F Local Description

with/without cross-circuit Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. The sensors must be
detection connected between T1 - Y12, Y33 and T2 – Y22, Y34. The device expects the test signal of
terminal T1 at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the test signal of T2 at the terminals Y22 and
Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the terminals Y12, Y33 or Y22, Y34
does not agree with the test signals T1, T2.
Cross-circuit detection must be deactivated if electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser
scanners are connected. In this case, the DM-F LOCAL no longer monitors the sensor
inputs for cross-circuits. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are already
monitored for cross-circuits in the sensor itself.
If "Without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the test outputs T1, T2 are
deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the Y12, Y22, Y33, and Y34 inputs, the
DM-F LOCAL expects a +24 V DC signal from the same current source as the one from
which the device receives its power supply (possible only in the case of DM-F LOCAL-
*1AB00) or from T3 (static +24 V DC).
In the case of the DM-F Local-*1AU00 device version, it is imperative to connect the T3
terminal to the floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation between the input
circuit and the sensor power supply.
1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors
2 NC evaluation with opposite types of contacts (NC/NO), such as are frequently used for magnetically-
operated switches, can also be evaluated. Make sure that the normally closed contact is
connected to Y12, and the normally open contact to Y22.
2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel • Two sensors with one contact each (2x 1-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both
• One sensor with two contacts each (1x 2-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both

DM-F Local Description

Delay time for sensor inputs Any change in the sensor signal during the delay time is not evaluated.
50 ms / 10 ms
• Delay 50 ms: Switch position changes of strongly bouncing contacts are suppressed
(e.g. position switches on heavy protective doors).
• Delay 10 ms: The shorter delay time permits faster deactivation of bounce-free sensors
(e.g. light arrays).
Sensor input automatic • Automatic start:
start / monitored start The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on
condition is satisfied at the sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1. The start button
• Monitored start:
The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on
condition is satisfied at the sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 and the start button at the
terminal Y33 has been actuated (start with the falling edge).
Cascade input automatic • Automatic start:
start / monitored start The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on
condition at the cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static +24 V DC signal is
• Monitored start:
The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on
condition at the cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static +24 V DC signal is
present (e.g. from T3), and the START button at terminal Y33 has been actuated (start
with falling edge).
With / without startup testing After a power failure, startup testing requires that the system operator actuates the sensors
With automatic starting / The parameters of the DM-F Local can be defined so that the enabling circuits switch
without automatic starting automatically to the active position again after a power failure, i.e. without actuation of the
after power failure start button Y33.
Requirements:
• Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start".
• The switch-on condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input is satisfied.
• The START button was actuated before the power failure and this was valid, i.e. the
DM-F PROFIsafe schematic

The "Safety-related tripping" DM-F PROFIsafe function block consists of three sockets:
● Event - PROFIsafe active: Fail-safe communication between the F-CPU and the DM-F
PROFIsafe is active.
● Event - "Safety-related tripping": Safety-related tripping has been carried out.
● Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.

The following schematic shows the DM-F PROFIsafe "Safety-related tripping" function block:
The PROFIsafe address is set using the DIP switches on the DM-F PROFIsafe:
Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe)

Use the DIP switches to set the PROFIsafe address on the DM-F PROFIsafe as follows:
If a DIP switch is at ON, the respective value is active. If more than one DIP switch is at ON,
the respective values must be added.
"Safety-related tripping" response

Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to safety-related tripping via DM-F Local or DM-
F PROFIsafe.
Note
The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-
● Tripping
● Deactivated
● Signaling
● Warning
Note
In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - separate function from control
function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode", only
"Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" can be set and not "Tripping".
"Safety-related tripping" reset

Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledgment of SIMOCODE pro faults caused
by safety-related tripping (default: Manual).

See also
Setting the safety relay functions (Page 333)
5.10.8 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)
Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via PROFIBUS DP, as
well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.
Bus monitoring
With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - bus" fault is generated if
● "Bus monitoring" is active
● Cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1), e.g. as a result of interruption of the
PROFIBUS DP connection.
● "Status - bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically exchanging
data with the PLC, "Status - bus o.k." is set to "1".
PLC/PCS monitoring
With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" message is generated if
● "PLC/PCS monitoring" is activated
● The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote" operating
mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
● "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP is in the
"CLEAR" state, "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" is set to"0".
If the "PLC/PCS monitoring - input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic receive - bit 0.7" bit,
the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Watchdog" (PLC/PCS monitoring) function block:

Note
PROFIBUS DP
"Bus monitoring" and "PLC/PCS monitoring" can only be effective if the DP slave watchdog
function is activated in the DP master system.
Watchdog settings
● Monitoring PLC/PCS input
Activation of the "Watchdog" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets
, e.g. PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
● Bus monitoring
– Activated:
If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - bus" message is generated and must be
acknowledged.
– Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - bus o.k." information can be evaluated at
any time.
● PLC/PCS monitoring
– Activated:
If a PLC fault occurs, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" message is generated and must be
acknowledged
– Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" information can be
evaluated at any time.
● Bus/PLC fault - reset
You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually.
Range: Manual/Auto
"Fault bus"/"Fault PLC/PCS" response

● Fault
● Deactivated
5.10.9 Time stamping
Description

Possible areas of application are:

● Precise chronological recording of faults in a process plant
Precondition
To use SIMOCODE pro V time stamping, the DP master being used must support time
synchronization functions via Profibus (e.g. DP master connections for SIMATIC S7-400), or
a master clock must be used (e.g. SICLOCK).
Process in Step 7
Time-of-day synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V is activated in the STEP 7 device
configuration in the slave properties under "Time Synchronization".
Note
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the clock master.
For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of timestamped information is analogous to transmission

with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2. Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used
for further processing of time stamped information in the CPU to transmit time stamped
messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks" library.
Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostics address of the DP slave from the
STEP 7 device configuration.
In the DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master - integrated via SIMOCODE pro - LADDR2
contains the diagnostics address of Slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro. For all other configurations,
LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.
In the DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master - integrated via SIMOCODE pro - LADDR2
contains the diagnostics address of Slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro. For all other configurations,
LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.
In contrast to the STEP 7 Online Help of FB 62, when integrating via GSD, the slot number
of the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal messages, and with Slot 0 for special
messages.
For further information on FB 62, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help system.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Time stamping" function block:

5.11 Logic modules
5.11 Logic modules
5.11.1 Truth table 2I/1O
Description
The truth table 2I/1O consists of:
● Two plugs
● One socket.
generated for.
In total, two truth tables (7 to 8) are available for the SIMOCODE pro S and
SIMOCODE pro V basic units.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table 2I/1O" logic modules:
Description
● Three plugs
● One socket.
generated for.

5.11 Logic modules

● Three truth tables (1 to 3) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
● Four truth tables (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
● Six truth tables (1 to 6) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table 3I/1O" logic modules:
Settings for truth table 1 - 9 3I/1O

● Input 1 to 3
Activation of the truth table by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP
control bits, etc.).

5.11 Logic modules
Description
● Five plugs
● Two sockets.
Overall, there is one truth table (9) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table 5I/2O" logic module:
Truth table 9, 5I/2O settings

● Input 1 to 5
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

5.11 Logic modules
5.11.4 Counter
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are controlled via the plugs
"+" or "-".
The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with
"Reset".
The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
● Plug +: Increase actual value by 1 (maximum: limit).
● Plug -: Reduce the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0)
● Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.
● Three plugs (input +, input -, reset)
● One socket
● Two counters (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
● Two counters (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
● Four counters (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counter" logic modules:

5.11 Logic modules
Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on
• The input delay
• The device cycle time.
Note
The actual value remains the same
• During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
• If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input -.
Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.
Settings of counters 1 to 4
● Input +
Increase actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits,
etc.).
● Input -
Reduce actual value by 1.
etc.).
● Reset
Reset actual value to 0 (count value and output)
etc.).
● Limit
The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where the counter issues an
output signal.
Range: 0 to 65535

5.11 Logic modules
5.11.5 Timer
Description
The timer consists of:
● One socket
The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer
type:
● With off delay
● With fleeting closing.
● Two timers (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
● Two timers (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
● Four timers (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules:
Note

5.11 Logic modules
Note
The response of the inputs of all timers (input, reset) has been completely changed to level-
active for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit from version *E05* or the SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit from version *E03*. Use of an unchanged parameter file utilizing integrated timers
may thus result in a different response if such basic units are used. For example, if "Fixed
level - '1'" is set at the timer input, the timer function is automatically restarted after the timer
reset occurs. However, in timers with the parameterized type = "Fleeting closing" there is no
change in the response.
Settings of timers 1 to 4
● Input
etc.).
● Reset
Reset actual value to 0.
etc.).
● Type
Different output responses
Range: With closing delay, closing delay with memory, with opening delay, with fleeting
closing
● Value
Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending on the
output response (type).
Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
5.11.6 Signal conditioning
Description
● Non-inverting
● Inverting
You can set the output response.

5.11 Logic modules
The signal conditioning consists of:

● One socket.
● Two signal conditioners (1 and 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
● Four signal conditioners (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
● Four signal conditioners (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioning" logic modules:
Note

5.11 Logic modules
Settings of signal conditioning 1 to 4

● Input
etc.).
● Reset
Reset signal conditioning to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs,
● Type
Different output responses;
● Range:
– Level not inverted
– Level inverted
– Edge rising with memory
– Edge falling with memory
5.11.7 Non-volatile element
Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners. However, these output signals are
retained after a power supply failure.
● Non-inverting
● Inverting
You can set the output response.
● One socket.
● Two non-volatile elements (1 and 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
● Two non-volatile elements (1 and 2) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
● Four non-volatile elements (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

5.11 Logic modules
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile elements" logic modules:
Note
Settings of non-volatile elements 1 to 4

● Input
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
● Reset
Reset signal conditioning to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
● Type
Different output responses;
Range:
– Level not inverted
– Level inverted
– Edge rising with memory
– Edge falling with memory

5.11 Logic modules
5.11.8 Flashing
Description
If an input signal is pending, the "Flashing" logic component issues an output signal with a
fixed frequency of 1 Hz between binary 0 and 1. This makes the LEDs on the operator panel
flash.
The logic module consists of:
● One plug
● One socket.
A total of three logic modules, "Flashing" (1 to 3), are available.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:
Flashing 1 to 3 settings
● Input
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)

5.11 Logic modules
5.11.9 Flicker
Description
LEDs.
If an input signal is pending, the "Flicker" logic module issues an output signal with a
frequency of 4 Hz.
The logic module consists of:
● One plug
● One socket.
A total of three logic modules, "Flicker" (1 to 3), are available.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flicker" logic modules:
Settings of flicker 1 to 3
● Input
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. signals, etc.)

5.11 Logic modules
5.11.10 Limit monitor
Description
With the limit monitor, any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored for limit
overshooting or limit undershooting.
The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket. In addition, limit monitors can be
"marked" according to their function.
Example: Monitoring the individual sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module
(temperature 1-3) for overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of:
● One analog plug
● One socket.
Overall, there are four limit monitors (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit monitor" logic modules:
Response for limit 1 to 4

● Signaling
● Delay
Range: 0 to 25, 5 s (0.5 s)

5.11 Logic modules
Functional principle
The limit signal issued depends on
● The operating state of the motor
● The TPF function
● The parameterized "activity":
– on
– on+
– run
– run+.
Limit monitor settings

● Input
Analog plug of the limit monitor for linking to the analog value to be monitored (2 bytes),
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)
● Type
Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or undershooting.
● Activity
Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to be evaluated:
– on, i.e. always evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running
– on+, i.e. always evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running.
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position;
– run, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in the test position (TPF).
– run+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up procedure is finished
(i.e. the "Start active" message is no longer active) and there is no test position
feedback (TPF); example: Cos phi monitoring
● Limit
Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by the "Limit monitor -
delay" parameter.
Range: 0 to 65535
● Delay
Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly overshot before the "Event
- limit" output is set.
Range: 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s)
● Marking
No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>";
range: max. 10 characters.
Note
When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit are used for the
analog value connected to the limit input. These always have a direct influence on the
unit of the limit to be set.

5.11 Logic modules
Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro:
Unit Range
Temperatures (e.g. max. temperature) 1K 0 to 65535
Operating hours 1s 0 to 1193046
Stop time 1h 0 to 65535
Active power 1W 0 to 4294967295
Apparent power 1 VA 0 to 4394967295
Timer actual value 100 ms 0 to 65535
Currents (e.g. max. current_Imax) 1% ls 0 to 66535
Analog module inputs -- 0 to 27648 (S7 format)
Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) must be parameterized for a limit monitor to monitor a
maximum temperature of 200 °C.
5.11.11 Calculators
5.11.11.1 Calculator 1
Description
The two logic modules "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" integrated in basic unit 2 are
capable of the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values featured in
SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted, e.g.
● Conversion of the measured temperature from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C
● Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
● Conversion of the 0 / 4 - 20-mA signals of the analog module directly into fill levels,
pressures and flow rates.
The analog value (2 bytes/1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a
defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (numerators, denominators,
operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value (2 bytes/1 word)
at the analog socket of the logic module for further processing.

5.11 Logic modules
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculator 1" logic module:
Settings
Calculator 1 Description
Input Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 to 65535
Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 to 65535
Numerator Range: -32768 to +32767, increment 1
Denominator Range: 0 to 255, increment 1
Offset Range: -32768 to +32767, increment 1

5.11 Logic modules
Formula
Output: Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word): Range: 0 - 65535
Example 1: Calculator

5.11 Logic modules
Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F
5.11.11.2 Calculator 2
Description
The two logic modules "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" integrated in basic unit 2 are
capable of the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values featured in
SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted, e.g.
● Conversion of the measured temperature from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C
● Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
● Conversion of the 0 / 4 - 20-mA signals of the analog module directly into fill levels,
pressures and flow rates.
The analog value (2 bytes/1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a
defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (numerators, denominators,
operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value (2 bytes/1 word)
at the analog socket of the logic module for further processing.

5.11 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculator 2" logic module:
Operating mode 1 and operating mode 2

The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the "Operating mode"
parameter:
● Operating mode 1
The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 using a
predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters (numerators,
denominators, offsets, operators).
● Operating mode 2
The analog values at input 1 and input 2 are processed together as a double word.
Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is calculated by
means of the formula defined for this operating mode using the specified parameters
(numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output by the function block as 1 word/2 bytes.
In operating mode 2, it is also possible to process double words (e.g. active power,
apparent power) and to
map them (2 bytes/1 word).

5.11 Logic modules
Settings
Calculator 2 Description
Input 1 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 to 65535
Input 2 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 to 65535
Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 to 65535
Numerator 1 Range: -128 to +127, increment 1
Denominator 1 Range: 0 to 255, increment 1
Numerator 2 * Range: 0 to 255, increment 1
Denominator 2 Range: -128 to +127, increment 1
*
Offset Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647,
Increment 2
Operating 1 or 2
mode
Operator * +, - , * , /
* Only relevant for operating mode = 1
Equations
● Operating mode 1: Both inputs of word type.
● Operating mode 2:
Both inputs 1 and 2 correspond to a D word input.
● Offset value range: - 2147483648 to 2147483647, increment 1.

● Output - calculated value: 2 bytes/1 word. Range 0 to 65535.

5.12 3UF50 compatibility mode
5.12.1 3UF50 compatibility mode - diagram of the data
Diagram of receive and send data
Table 5- 2 Control
Basic type 1 Basic type 1 Basic type 2 Basic type 2 Basic type 3 Basic type 3
SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE
DP pro V DP pro V DP pro V
0 Cyclic receive 0 Cyclic receive 0 Cyclic receive
1 bit 0 ... 1.7 1 bit 0 ... 1.7 1 bit 0 ... 1.7
2 Receive data 2 Receive data 2 Receive data

3 Not supported 3 Not supported 3 Not supported
Table 5- 3 Send
Basic type 1 Basic type 1 Basic type 2 Basic type 2 Basic type 3 Basic type 3
SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE SIMOCODE
DP pro V DP pro V DP pro V
0 Send data Cyclic send 0 Send data Cyclic send 0 Send data Cyclic send
1 bit 0.0 .. 1.7 1 bit 0.0 .. 1.7 1 bit 0.0 .. 1.7
2 Motor current Specified: Max. 2 Motor current Specified: Max. 2 Cyclic send
3 current I_max 3 current I_max 3 bit 0.0 ... 1.7
4 Number of Number of
5 starts starts
(bytes 0 ... 3)
6
7 Counter 1 Counter 1
8 value value - actual
value
9 Counter 2 Counter 2
10 value value - actual
value
11 Sensor value TM - max.
temperature

Diagram of diagnostics data

The following table shows the diagnostics data in 3UF50 compatibility mode:
Byte, Structure of 3UF50 device- Byte Structure of 3UF50 device- Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
bit specific diagnostics in , bit specific diagnostics in
accordance with the DP accordance with DPV1
standard of SIMOCODE-DP SIMOCODE-DP
6 0x0B Same as 3UF50 diagnostics
7 0x81
8 0x04
6 0x0E 9 0x00
7.0 Free 10.0 Free
7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - startup parameter block active
7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - emergency start executed
7.3 Event: HW test o.k. 10.3 Event: HW test o.k. • No fault - HW fault basic unit
• No fault - module fault
• No fault - temporary components
7.4 Free 10.4 Free ---
7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event: external fault 5
7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event: external fault 6
7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 ---
8.0 Warning: Ext. warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning: external fault 3
8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% Warning. Unbalance
8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC/PCS (inverted)
8.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit Warning - thermistor short circuit
8.4 Event: Cooling down period 11.4 Event: Cooling down period Status - cooling down period active
active active
8.5 11.5 Status: TPF Status - test position (TPF)
8.6 Free 11.6 Free ---
8.7 Free 11.7 Free ---
9.0 Warning: Ground fault 12.0 Warning: Ground fault • Warning - Int. ground fault
or
• Warning - Ext. ground fault
9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning: Overload Warning: Overload
9.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload + Warning: Overload + phase failure
unbalance
9.3 Warning: I1 response level 12.3 Warning: I1 response level Warning - Warning level I>
overshot overshot
9.4 Warning: I1 response level 12.4 Warning: I1 response level Warning - Warning level I<
undershot undershot
9.5 Warning: I2 response level 12.5 Warning: I2 response level ---
overshot overshot
9.6 Warning: I2 response level 12.6 Warning: I2 response level ---
undershot undershot

9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor • Warning - thermistor overload
• Warning - thermistor open circuit
• Warning - TM warning T>
• Warning - TM sensor fault
• Warning - TM out of range
10.0 Trip: Ground fault 13.0 Trip: Ground fault • Fault - Int. ground fault
or
• Fault - Ext. ground fault
10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Fault - overload
10.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance Fault - overload + phase failure
10.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 response level Fault - trip level I>
overshot
10.4 Trip: I1 response level 13.4 Trip: I1 response level Fault - trip level I<
undershot undershot
10.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 response level ---
overshot
10.6 Trip: I2 response level 13.6 Trip: I2 response level ---
undershot undershot
10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor • Warning - thermistor overload
• Warning - thermistor short circuit
• Warning - thermistor open circuit
• Warning - TM warning T>
• Warning - TM sensor fault
• Warning - TM out of range
11.0 Trip: FB ON 14.0 Trip: FB ON Fault - feedback ON
11.1 Trip: FB OFF 14.1 Trip: FB OFF Fault - feedback OFF
11.2 Trip: Stalled rotor 14.2 Trip: Stalled rotor Fault - stalled rotor
11.3 Trip: Stalled positioner 14.3 Trip: Stalled positioner Fault - stalled positioner
11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Fault - double 0
11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Fault - double 1
11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Fault - end position
11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Fault - antivalence
12.0 Trip: ESB 14.0 Trip: ESB Fault - external fault 4
12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO)
12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: UVO Fault - undervoltage (UVO)
12.3 Trip: external fault 1 15.3 Trip: external fault 1 Fault - external fault 1
12.4 Trip: external fault 2 15.4 Trip: external fault 2 Fault - external fault 2
12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Fault - cold start (TPF) fault
12.6 Trip: Runtime On 15.6 Trip: Runtime On Fault - execution ON command

12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Fault - execution STOP command
13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Fault - parameterization
13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 ---
13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Fault - configuration error
13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Fault - HW fault basic unit
14 ... Number of overload trips Number of overload trips
15
16 ... I of the overload trip [%/IE] Last trip current
17
18 ... Operating hours [10 h] Motor operating hours
19


Commissioning 6
6.1 Control/status information
Controlling the feeder
The feeder is controlled with "ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>".
The number of buttons depends on the control function selected. The buttons are not
present on the overload relay. On the direct starter, only "OFF" and "ON" are shown.
The buttons are only effective if
● The operator enables for the operator panel [OP] are set when the connection is made
via the system interface
● The operator enables for PC [DPV1] are set when the connection is made via the
fieldbus.
Acknowledging faults
Faults are acknowledged and the device is made ready for operation again with "Reset".
Hardware test
A hardware test is initiated with "Test".
Note
The different messages are indicated by the lamp symbols.
See also
Diagnostics via LED display (Page 325)

Commissioning
6.2 Faults
6.2 Faults
Displaying faults
Different fault messages concerning the following topics are indicated by lamp symbols:
● Control system
● Protection
● Safety technology
● Monitoring
● Other - General
Control system
Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction

Execution ON command The motor feeder could not be turned on after an ON command was issued. Possible causes of
the fault:
• Main circuit is interrupted (fuse, circuit breaker)
• The motor contactor or contactor control is defective
• "Execution time" parameter too short.
Acknowledge with "Reset" or OFF command/counter-command.
Execution Off command The motor feeder could not be turned off after an OFF command was issued. Possible causes
of the fault:
• The contactor contact is welded
• "Execution time" parameter too short
• The "OPEN" end position has not been reached during the parameterized runtime (only for
the "Positioner" and "Valve" control functions).
Acknowledge with "Reset" or a counter-command.
Feedback (FB) ON Current is flowing in the motor feeder without the motor feeder being switched on. Possible
causes of the fault:
• Contactor contacts have been manually activated
• Contactor was not activated using the corresponding SIMOCODE QE output
• The "CLOSED" end position has not been reached during the parameterized runtime (only
for the "Positioner" and "Valve" control functions).
Acknowledge with "Reset" or a counter-command.
Feedback (FB) OFF The current flow in the motor feeder has been interrupted without the motor feeder being turned
off. The positioner may be blocked. Possible causes of the fault:
• The main circuit has been interrupted (fuse, circuit breaker, main switch)
• The motor contactor or contactor control is defective.
Test position feedback Current is flowing in the motor feeder although the motor feeder is in the test position (TPF).
The main circuit is not interrupted in test operation.

Commissioning
6.2 Faults

Power failure (UVO) The power failure lasted longer than the set power failure time.
Stalled positioner "Positioner" control function:
The torque switch has activated before or without the respective limit switch.
Possible cause of the fault: The positioner is blocked.
Acknowledge by "releasing" with the counter-command "OPEN/CLOSED".
Please check the positioner application and the limit switches.
Double 0 "Positioner" control function:
If both torque switches respond simultaneously (TO=0 and TC=0), the positioner is switched off
immediately with the fault message 'Fault - double 0'. Possible causes of the fault:
• Open circuit torque switch
• Torque switch is defective.
Double 1 "Positioner" control function:
If both limit switches respond simultaneously (FO=1 and FC=1), the positioner is switched off
immediately with the fault message 'Fault - double 1'.
Possible cause of the fault: Limit switch is defective.
End position "Positioner" control function:
Positioner/valve has left the end position without a command being issued. The motor feeder
has been turned off.
Acknowledge by "releasing" with the counter-command "OPEN/CLOSED".
Antivalence "Positioner" control function:
The limit switches are not reporting any antivalent signals.
Possible cause of the fault: Limit switch open circuit.
Please check the positioner application and the limit switches.
Acknowledge with the counter-command "OPEN/CLOSED"
Protection

Overload The motor feeder has been overloaded.
Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor.
The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an
emergency start.
Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active.
Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174).
Overload + phase failure The motor feeder has been overloaded.
Possible cause: Phase failure.
Check the motor and the motor feeder.
emergency start.
Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174) and Unbalance protection (Page 179).

Commissioning
6.2 Faults

Unbalance The unbalance level has been exceeded.
emergency start.
Further information: See Unbalance protection (Page 179).
Stalled rotor The maximum motor current has exceeded the threshold for stalled rotor protection.
Possible cause of the fault: The motor is blocked.
Please check the application that is being driven by the motor.
Further information: See Blocking protection (Page 180).
Thermistor trip level Thermistor protection has activated. The temperature of the motor is too high.
The motor cannot be switched on again until the temperature has reached the reset point of the
thermistor.
Further information: See Thermistor protection (Page 181).
Safety technology

DM-F safety-related The DM-F has tripped the enabling circuit for safety reasons.
tripping The motor cannot be switched on again until the enabling circuits of the DM-F are reclosed.
Further information: See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).
DM-F wiring A wiring error has occurred on the DM-F (short-circuit to ground in the sensor/feedback circuit).
Check the wiring of the sensor circuits/feedback circuit and correct the fault.
DM-FL cross circuit A cross-circuit fault has occurred in the sensor circuit of the DM-F Local.
Check the wiring of the two sensor circuits for cross-circuit faults and correct the fault.

Commissioning
6.2 Faults
Monitoring

Trip level I> The maximum current has overshot the trip level.
Further information: See Current limits I> (upper limit) (Page 198).
Trip level I< The maximum current has undershot the trip level.
Further information: See Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199).
Internal ground fault Internal ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing.
Please check the motor connection cable for damage.
Further information: See Internal ground-fault monitoring (Page 195).
External ground fault External ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing.
Further information: See External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196).
Trip level P> The active power of the motor has overshot the trip level.
Further information: See Active power monitoring (Page 204).
Trip P< The active power of the motor has undershot the trip level.
Trip level U< The voltage in the motor feeder has undershot the trip level.
Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the network
• Fuse has tripped.
Check the motor feeder.
Further information: See Voltage monitoring (Page 201).
Trip level cos phi< The power factor cos phi has undershot the trip level.
Possible cause: The motor is being operated without a load.
Further information: See Cos phi monitoring (Page 203).
Trip level 0 / The measured value at the analog input has overshot the trip level.
4 - 20 mA> Check the measuring station.
Further information: See 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (Page 205).
Trip level 0 / The measured value at the analog input has undershot the trip level.
4 - 20 mA< Check the measuring station.

Commissioning
6.2 Faults

No. of starts > The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has already been exceeded. The
next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.
Further information: See Number of starts monitoring motor (Page 210).
Temperature at trip The temperature warning level has been exceeded.
level T> Check the temperature measuring station.
Further information: See Temperature monitoring (analog) (Page 211).
Other - General

External fault 1 to 6 A signal is pending at the input (socket) of the "External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard function.
Acknowledgment depending on parameterization.
Further information: See External fault (Page 247).
Bus PROFIBUS DP communication has been interrupted or is interrupted.
Check the PROFIBUS connection (plugs, cables, etc.).
Further information: See Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) (Page 258) and
Diagnostics via LED display (Page 325).
PLC/PCS The PLC that controls the feeder was or is in STOP mode.
Check the operating state of the PLC.
Further information: See Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) (Page 258).
Hardware fault basic The SIMOCODE pro basic unit hardware is defective.
unit Replace the basic unit.
Further information: See Replacing the basic unit (Page 334) and Diagnostics via LED display
(Page 325).
Module fault At least 1 SIMOCODE pro module is not ready for use.
Possible causes:
• Connecting cable defective or incorrectly connected
• Module defective. Replace the module.
Further information: See
Replacing the basic unit (Page 334)
Replacing the expansion module (Page 334)
Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module (Page 335)
Diagnostics via LED display (Page 325).
Temporary Fault - temporary components (addressing plug, memory module or PC cable).
components Replace the defective components.

Commissioning
6.2 Faults

Configuration error The configured device configuration does not match the actual configuration.
Measures:
• Check whether all the configured components are available
• Check the actual configuration with "Configuration".
Further information: See Actual configuration (Page 309).
Analog modules 1/2 An open circuit has occurred in the analog value measuring circuit.
open circuit Check the measured value sensor and the measuring circuit.
Further information: See Analog module (Page 236).
Thermistor short circuit A short circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.
Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor.
Acknowledge with "Reset" after correcting the fault.
Thermistor open circuit An open circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.
Acknowledge with "Reset" after correcting the fault.
Temperature module Either a short circuit or an open circuit has occurred in the temperature sensor circuit.
1/2 sensor fault Check the temperature sensor and the sensor cable.
Temperature module Temperature sensor is delivering impermissible values.
1/2 out of range Check the temperature sensor.
Parameterization Incorrect parameters:
1. Set new parameters
2. Switch the control voltage off and on again.
Test trip The motor feeder has been checked and switched off by a test trip.
Operational protection An "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" signal is pending. A switched-on motor feeder has been
OFF (OPO) switched off. The feeder cannot be switched on while the OPO signal is active.
Further information: See Operational protection OFF (OPO) (Page 250).

Commissioning
6.3 Warnings
6.3 Warnings
Displaying warnings
Different warnings concerning the following topics are indicated by lamp symbols.
● Protection
● Safety technology
● Monitoring
● Other - General
Protection

Prewarning overload (I>115%Is) The motor feeder is in overload operation. If this condition continues to persist, the
motor feeder will trip within a short period of time due to overload.
Unbalance The unbalance level has been exceeded.
The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after
an emergency start.
Further information: See Unbalance protection (Page 179).
Overload The motor feeder has been overloaded.
an emergency start.
Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174).
Overload + phase failure The motor feeder has been overloaded.
Possible cause: Phase failure.
an emergency start.
Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174) and Unbalance protection
(Page 179).
Stalled rotor The maximum motor current has exceeded the threshold for stalled rotor protection.
Possible cause of the fault: The motor is blocked.
Further information: See Blocking protection (Page 180).
Thermistor trip level Thermistor protection has activated. The temperature of the motor is too high.
The motor cannot be switched on again until the temperature has reached the reset
point of the thermistor.

Commissioning
6.3 Warnings
Safety technology

Monitoring interval for The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe have not been opened and
mandatory testing closed again within the configured time period.
The function of the enabling circuit relay contacts can only be tested when they are
switched.
Further information: See Monitoring interval for mandatory testing (Page 213).
DM-F safety-related tripping The DM-F has tripped the enabling circuit for safety reasons.
The motor cannot be switched on again until the enabling circuits of the DM-F module are
reclosed.
DM-FL simultaneity The DM-F Local has detected a discrepancy error in the two-channel sensor circuit.
Check the switching elements in the sensor circuit.
DM-F feedback circuit The DM-F has detected a fault in the feedback circuit.
The feedback circuit must be closed at the time of switching on the enabling circuit.
Check the feedback circuit of the DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe.
Monitoring

Warning level I> The maximum current has overshot the warning level.
Further information: See Current limits I> (upper limit) (Page 198).
Warning level I< The maximum current has undershot the warning level.
Further information: See Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199).
Internal ground fault Internal ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is
flowing.
Further information: See Internal ground-fault monitoring (Page 195).
External ground fault External ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is
flowing.
Further information: See External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196).
Warning level P> The active power of the motor has overshot the warning level.
Warning level P< The active power of the motor has undershot the warning level.

Commissioning
6.3 Warnings

Warning level U< The voltage in the motor feeder has undershot the warning level.
Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the network
• Fuse has tripped.
Further information: See Voltage monitoring (Page 201).
Warning level cos phi < The power factor cos phi has undershot the warning level.
Possible cause: The motor is being operated without a load.
Further information: See Cos phi monitoring (Page 203).
Warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> The measured value at the analog input has overshot the warning level.
(analog module 1/2) Check the measuring station.
Warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< The measured value at the analog input has undershot the warning level.
(analog module 1/2) Check the measuring station.
No. of starts > The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has already been exceeded.
The next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.
Further information: See Number of starts monitoring motor (Page 210).
Just one start possible The start after the next one should not be carried out until the interlocking time has
expired.
No start permitted The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has been attained. The next
start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.
Motor operating hours > The configured limit value for motor operating hours monitoring has been exceeded.
Please apply the maintenance measures intended for the feeder.
Stop time > The configured limit value for stop time monitoring has been exceeded.
Please apply the maintenance measures intended for the feeder. If possible, switch on the
feeder.
Warning level T > The temperature warning level (temperature module 1/2) has been exceeded.
Check the temperature measuring station.
Further information: See Temperature monitoring (analog) (Page 211).
DM-F test requirement The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe have not been opened and
closed again within the configured time period.
The function of the enabling circuit relay contacts can only be tested when they are
switched.
Please apply the maintenance measures prescribed for this scenario.

Commissioning
6.3 Warnings
Other - General

External fault 1 to 6 A signal is pending at the input (socket) of the "External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard
function.
Further information: See Auto-Hotspot.
Analog modules 1/2 open An open circuit has occurred in the analog value measuring circuit.
circuit Check the measured value sensor and the measuring circuit.
Further information: See Analog module (Page 236).
Thermistor short circuit A short circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.
Thermistor open circuit An open circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.
Temperature module 1/2 Either a short circuit or an open circuit has occurred in the temperature sensor circuit.
sensor fault Check the temperature sensor and the sensor cable.
Temperature module 1/2 Temperature sensor is delivering impermissible values.
out of range Check the temperature sensor.
See also
Motor protection (Page 173)
Machine monitoring (Page 195)

Commissioning
6.4 Messages
6.4 Messages
Display of messages

Startup parameter block active The startup parameter block prevents transfer of SIMOCODE pro parameters
that can be saved in the DP master.
The block must be set if SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM is used for
parameterization.
The block must not be set if SIMOCODE pro C/pro V is integrated into STEP 7
via SIMOCODE pro, or if SIMOCODE pro C has been parameterized via the
GSD.
Configuration error The configured device configuration does not match the actual configuration.
• Check whether all the configured components are available
• Check the actual configuration with "Configuration".
Required function is not supported At least one parameterized function is not supported by the version of the basic
unit.
• Activate only the functions that are supported by the version of the basic
unit. For example, SIMOCODE pro V basic units with the version E01 do
not support voltage measurement, the temperature module or the analog
module.
Wrong parameter The parameter data transferred to the unit is incorrect. Errors in the parameter
data can occur, for example, if the device has not been parameterized with
SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM.
• Check the parameter data (data sets 130 - 133) that has been transmitted
to the device for the correct content.
Parameter changes not allowed in the You attempted to change at least one parameter that cannot be changed in the
current operating state current operating state. Many parameters can only be changed if the motor
feeder is switched off and not in "Remote" mode.
Password wrong The SIMOCODE pro parameters are protected by a password. An attempt has
been made to change the parameters without entering the password.
• Please use the correct password for changing the parameters. If you do not
know the password, new parameters can only be entered after the factory
settings have been restored.
Further information: See Restoring factory settings (Page 330).
DM-F safety-related tripping The DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe has tripped the enabling circuits for safety
reasons.
The motor cannot be switched on again until the enabling circuits of the DM-F
module are reclosed.
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe have not been
opened and closed again within the configured time period.
The function of the enabling circuit relay contacts can only be tested when they
are switched.
Further information: See Monitoring interval for mandatory testing (Page 213).

Commissioning
6.4 Messages

DM-F Local o.k. The DM-F Local is ready for operation.
PROFIsafe active The DM-F PROFIsafe is in the "PROFIsafe active" status.
DM-F Local configuration mode The DM-F Local is in "Configuration mode" status.
Complete the configuration.
DM-F Local Actual and set configuration The actual configuration of the DM-F Local does not correspond to the
are different parameterized set configuration.
Check whether the effective configuration actually agrees with the
parameterized set configuration, and if necessary, correct the effective
configuration by setting the DIP switches or the parameterized set
configuration.
DM-F Local waiting for start-up test The DM-F Local is in the "Waiting for start-up test" status.
DM-F incorrect PROFIsafe address or The parameter settings of the PROFIsafe profile are incorrect or the set
incorrect PROFIsafe parameters PROFIsafe address is not identical to the configured address.
Check the PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe parameters of SIMOCODE pro that were set
on the DP master system. (Modify text)
Status - enabling circuit closed The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe are closed.
No module voltage Supply voltage on the DM-F is either too low or there is no voltage.
Check whether the terminals are correctly wired.
The DM-F module is possibly defective. Replace the module.
Initialization module write-protected The initialization module is completely write-protected.
Initialization module write-protected, The initialization modules is completely or partially write-protected.
parameter changes not allowed Reparameterization of SIMOCODE pro is denied because the initialization
module is write-protected.
Initialization module identification data The device addressing and the I&M data in the initialization module are write-
write-protected protected. Parameterization will only be accepted by SIMOCODE if the new
parameter set is identical to the data stored in the initialization module at that
time.
• Select a parameterization with identical addressing and I&M data
• Deactivate the partial write protection of the initialization module.
Initialization module read in The parameters of the initialization module were read into SIMOCODE.
Initialization module programmed The reparameterization was accepted in the initialization module.
Initialization module deleted The initialization module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state.
Memory module read in The parameters of the memory module were read into SIMOCODE.
Memory module erased The memory module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state.
Memory module programmed The reparameterization was accepted in the memory module.
Memory module write-protected The memory module is completely write-protected.
Deactivate write protection of the memory module.

Commissioning
6.5 Measured values
6.5 Measured values

Displaying measured values
Current Range Unit

Max. current I_max 0 to 65535 % Is
Current I_L1 0 to 65535 % Is
Last trip current 0 to 65535 % Is
Phase unbalance 0 to 100 % (100% corresponds to the failure of one phase)
Voltage Range Unit

Voltage U_L1 0 to 65535 V
For voltage measurements, you require SIMOCODE pro V with a current/voltage measuring
module.
Thermal motor model Range Unit

Thermal motor model 0 to 255 %, related to the symmetrical trip level;
(Page 174) Representation in 2% increments in bits 6 to 0 (value
range 0 to 254%);
Bit 7 indicates unbalance (fixed level 50%)
Remaining cooling down 0 to 65535 s
period
Time to trip 0 to 65535 s
(The motor is currently not in an overload situation.
However, under the current load conditions, the motor
will be switched off in x seconds due to overload.)
Power/power factor Range Unit

Active power P 0 to 4294967.295 kW
Apparent power S 0 to 4294967.295 kVA
Cos phi 0 to 100 % (power factor is 100% if the motor current is flowing
or no voltage is measured.)
For power considerations, you require SIMOCODE pro V with a current/voltage measuring
module.

Commissioning
6.5 Measured values
Temperature module 1/2 Range Unit

Max. temperature - 273 to 65262 °C
Temperature 1 - 273 to 65262 °C
For temperature measurements, you require SIMOCODE pro V with a temperature module
and the corresponding temperature sensor.
Analog module 1/2 Range Unit

Analog module - input 1 0 to 27648 S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0, 20 mA = 27648
Analog module - input 2 0 to 27648 S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0, 20 mA = 27648
Analog module - output 0 to 27648 S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0, 20 mA = 27648

Commissioning
6.6 Service data - statistical data
Displaying statistical data
Motor Range
Motor operating hours 0 to 1193046 h
Motor operating hours > See Warnings (Page 294)
Number of overload trips 0 to 65535
Number of starts 0 to 4294967295
Permissible starts - actual value 0 to 255
Just one start possible See Warnings (Page 294)
No start permitted See Warnings (Page 294)
Stop time 0 to 65535 h
Stop time > See Warnings (Page 294)
Consumed energy 0 to 4294967295 kWh
Time until test required 0 to 255 w (weeks)
Test required See Warnings (Page 294), DM-F test range (Page 294)
For example, via "Motor operating hours" and "Number of starts", you can decide whether
the motor and/or the motor contactors should be replaced. You can modify these values by
entering a new value in the right input field and then clicking on "Set". The value is adopted
by the device.
Basic unit Range Meaning

Device operating hours 0 to 1193046 Specifies for how long the power supply of the
SIMOCODE pro was switched on.
You can find further information under Fault
memory (Page 304).
Module time: Time information for the unbuffered real-time clock
• Date (only in conjunction with SIMOCODE pro S basic
unit).
• Time
The real-time clock can be synchronized using an
NTP server or via Target system -> Command
(Page 306).
Time shift UTC + h Configured time difference between the module
time and UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) (only
in conjunction with SIMOCODE pro S basic unit)
Int. number of parameter 0 to 65535
settings

Commissioning
Setting ranges for timers, counters and calculators

● Timer 1-6 - actual value
Range: 0 to 6554 s
● Counter 1-6 - actual value
Range: 0 to 65535
● Calculators 1-4 - output
Range: 0 to 65535

Commissioning
6.7 Error buffer/error protocol
6.7 Error buffer/error protocol
Description
Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours (resolution: 1 s) of
SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is given a time
stamp.
● Error/Fault
The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer, whereby the incoming error (rising edge) is
always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be logged.
● Power - On:
If the most recent entry is "Power - On", this is not logged multiple times. Instead, the
error number is used as a power-on counter. Thus, the error buffer cannot be deleted by
frequent on/off operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit open" are
logged for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a separate window:
● Time
● Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"
● Number:
- Line 1: 200 or 202
- Line 2: 201 or 203
● Text:
- Line 1: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 → 1" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 0 -> 1"
- Line 2: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 → 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 1 → 0".
The current DIP switch position of the "DM-F Local" and/or "DM-F PROFIsafe" is displayed
under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last event".

Commissioning
6.8 Test
6.8 Test
Testing functions
To test the functions, proceed as follows:
1. Select the device-internal outputs (sockets) and display the logic states.
2. Select the device-internal inputs (plugs) and set their input signals to 0 or 1 by clicking on
the corresponding buttons.
3. Display the logic states of the device-internal inputs (plugs).
4. Use this procedure to test, for example, the functioning of the truth tables.
Schematic
Note
The input can only be set in the test position, that is, the standard function "Test position
feedback (TPF)" must be active!
See also

Commissioning
6.9 Command
6.9 Command
Sending commands to SIMOCODE pro
Note
The command is executed immediately!
Command Meaning
Addressing plug - adopt DP Reading of the DP address from the addressing plug. The addressing
address plug must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.
Program memory module Parameters are transferred to the memory module. The memory
module must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.
Clear memory module Parameters in the memory module are deleted. The memory module
must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.
Read memory module Transfer of the parameters from the memory module to the basic unit.
The memory module must be plugged into the system interface for this
purpose.
Memory module write All contents of the memory module are write-protected. This prevents
protection on any inadvertent changes to the contents of the memory module and
any parameter changes to the connected SIMOCODE pro S basic unit.
Inadvertent changing of parameters for a motor feeder is thus
prevented.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with
the event "Memory module write-protected".
Memory module write With this command you can cancel the write protection of the memory
protection off module.
Initialization module write All contents of the initialization module are write-protected. This
protection on prevents any inadvertent changes to the contents of the initialization
module and any parameter changes to the connected
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit.
Inadvertent changing of parameters for a motor feeder is thus
prevented.
SIMOCODE pro signals successful execution of the command with the
"initialization module write-protected" event.
Initialization module write With this command, you can remove the write protection of the
protection off initialization module.

Commissioning
6.9 Command
Command Meaning
Initialization module write (Identification & Maintenance) are write-protected. With this command,
protection for identification you can
data in
• prevent inadvertent changes to the parameters (e.g. device names)
and the I&M data for the motor feeder.
• continue to make parameter changes in the initialization module as
well as in the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit if the address data and
I&M data are identical to the data already contained in the device
when parameters are downloaded.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with
the "initialization module identification data write-protected" event.
Initialization module With this command, you can remove the write protection of the
identification data write identification data of the initialization module.
protection off
Clear initialization module With this command
• all contents of the initialization module are deleted
• The initialization module is reset to the as-delivered state.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful deletion with the "Initialization
module cleared" event.
On startup with an empty initialization module, the basic unit signals
"Fault - parameterization". The "General Fault" LED of the basic unit
flashes red.
Reparameterization of the device, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES, writes
valid parameters to the basic unit and the initialization module again.
You can then acknowledge the fault message.
Cold restart Initialization of SIMOCODE pro. New start.
Factory setting All parameters have their factory setting again, except for the
password. Only possible if password protection is not active or the
password is known.
Set time (= PC time) If an NTP server address has not been configured or a server was not
found on the network, you can set the time of day here. The system
time of the PC is then calculated and transferred to the device in the
format "NTP clock".
If a valid time of day is available (either synchronized by NTP or set via
SIMOCODE ES), the entries in the error buffer/error protocol (i.e. log)
will be additionally displayed with the time of day. In addition, the
"Clock set (NTP)" and "Clock synchronized (NTP)" messages are
displayed.
Test Execute (Page 242) test function. Same function as "Test/Reset"
button on the basic unit and operator panel.
Reset Performing a reset operation. Acknowledging faults. Same function as
"Test/Reset" button on the basic unit and operator panel.

Commissioning
6.10 Password
6.10 Password
Assign a password for SIMOCODE pro. This allows the protection in the basic unit to be
activated or deactivated. Only if protection is deactivated can parameters be saved in or
exported to the basic unit.
Note
If the password is not known, parameter changes can only be carried out after "Establish
factory settings with Test/Reset on the basic unit"!
The current device parameters (including the password) are thus restored to the factory
settings.
See also
Restoring factory settings (Page 330)
6.11 Parameter comparison

SIMOCODE ES compares parameters from the connected device (online value) with the
parameters in the project (offline value). The values that differ from each other are displayed.

Commissioning
6.12 Actual configuration
6.12 Actual configuration
Read in actual configuration

● Establish a connection with SIMOCODE pro.
● Read in the existing configuration.
● Establish whether or not the set device configuration agrees with the actual device
configuration.
This is shown by the following symbols:
Symbol Description
Module available and ready for operation
Module not available
Module faulty
● Check DIP switch position (if DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe)
The "Actual configuration" shows the actual DIP switch position from data set 105 (see
System Manual),
The configured DIP switch position comes from data set 130 (see System Manual).
You will find additional information on the Internet at: System manuals
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300).

Commissioning
6.13 Analog value recording

With the "Analog value recording" function block, you record any analog values
(2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro. The recording time period can be adjusted.
SIMOCODE must be online for analog value recording.
● Establish the online connection via the LifeList.
Alternatively, click on "Connect Online" in the project.
● During commissioning, open the section "Analog value recording".
Functions of analog value recording:
1. Upload values
Upload the 60 recorded values and show values as graphics.
2. Save
Save and export the 60 values as a csv file.
3. "Trigger event occurred"
After the trigger event defined in the parameters has occurred, the display shows a green
light. After the trigger event, 60 values are recorded again.
4. Graphical representation
The 60 recorded values are shown in a diagram.
The recording is made direct in SIMOCODE pro, related to the motor feeder, and
independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system.
Each value present at the analog output "assigned analog value" is recorded and saved.
Recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/negative) via any binary signal at the
trigger input of the function block. Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The
time frame of the recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate [s] x 60 values

The pre-trigger is used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence before
the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the total sampling time.

Commissioning
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog value monitoring (record)" function block:
● Trigger input
Start of analog value recording with any signal (any outputs, e.g. device inputs, current
flowing)
● Assigned analog value
● Trigger edge
Positive/negative
● Sampling rate
0.1 to 50 seconds in 0.1 s increments
● Pre trigger
0 to 100% in 5 % increments

Commissioning

Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for
SIMOCODE 7
7.1 Description
The graphic editor is an optional, graphical expansion to the SIMOCODE ES
parameterization and service
software.
It is not mandatory for parameterizing SIMOCODE pro. However, it facilitates and
accelerates parameterization via the graphical user interface. It is specially designed for
combining function blocks (e.g. timers, truth tables, etc.). Plugs are connected with sockets
by dragging & dropping.
Before the device is parameterized with the graphic editor, the following definitions have
been made since these are only possible directly from the "SIMOCODE ES" software:
1. Identification > Marking (Page 165) (if required)
2. Device configuration (Page 157) (always required)
3. Device parameters > Bus parameters (Page 171) (if required)
4. Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode (Page 282) (if required).

Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE
7.2 Overview - Toolbar - Menu commands
7.2 Overview - Toolbar - Menu commands

The following table shows the different Toolbar buttons and the associated commands:
Button Command
Transfer online data to the hardware
Transfer online data to the offline project
Position blocks according to data flow
Grid on/off
Insert text field
Highlight for signal flow
View > Show all
View > Zoom in
View > Zoom dialog
View > Zoom out
Show/hide unused connections
Monitoring On/Off
Plans folder
Start graphic editor
Delete
7.3 Calling the graphic editor

There are two methods of opening the graphic editor:
1. Go to Project view and open your project. Click in the project navigation window on
"SIMOCODE > Plans > Plan_1" to open the graphic editor.
2. Alternatively, change to the "Portal view (lower left corner of the screen) > Control
devices configuration > Plan_1".
Note
Starting the graphic editor with Basic, Standard or Premium License
The graphic editor is always installed.
• With the BASIC License, the information that the suitable license for starting the graphic
editor is not available is shown.
• The graphic editor can only be started with a Standard or Premium License.

7.4 Functions
7.4 Functions
7.4.1 Connecting
Drawing a connection
You can connect function block terminals with each other. To do so, proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Move the cursor over an unconnected input. It is then highlighted.
2 • Press the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
• Keep the mouse button pressed and draw a connection to the output until it is highlighted
in blue.
3 Release the mouse button.
4 A connection is established between the two terminals.
Note:
You can also draw the connection from the output to the input.
Rules for drawing connections:

● Several connections can originate from one output.
● Only one connection can be connected to an input.
● Binary outputs can only be connected to binary inputs, and analog outputs can only be
connected to analog inputs.
Marking the function block or connection

You can use the mouse to mark both function blocks and connections. Multiple selection is
possible with Ctrl. + click.
Moving the function block or connection

Keep the mouse button pressed to move function blocks and connections. When function
blocks are moved, the start and end points of connections are fixed, since they are linked to
the terminals of function blocks.

7.4 Functions
Deleting the function block or connection

If you delete function blocks, all connections emanating from the function block will also be
deleted. Deleting a function block means it will not be used in the current plan; in other
words, all inputs and outputs of the function block are not connected.
See also
Select all (Page 316)
7.4.2 Selecting a function block or connection block and using it in the plan
You can drag & drop function blocks and blocks to the plan and then interconnect them. The
function blocks are stored hierarchically in directories. The graphics symbol shows the
function block that can be inserted into the plan or that is already used in the plan.
Alternatively, you can transfer function blocks and blocks to the plan by double-clicking.
7.4.3 Select all

You can mark all function blocks, connections and comments with the menu command "Edit"
> "Select all", or with the key combination "Ctrl.+A".
Alternatively, you can draw a rectangle over all objects with the mouse.
The marked elements can then be moved or deleted.
7.4.4 Move plan

The view of the plan can be moved up, down, to the right, and to the left using the scroll
bars.

7.4 Functions
7.4.5 Monitoring
With the "Monitoring" function, you can monitor the inputs and outputs of function blocks
online.
● Change to "Project navigation > Devices > SIMOCODE_1 > Plans > Plan_1".
● Click the "Monitoring on/off" button to switch the function on. The objects
interconnected in the plan are monitored online according to their settings and
specifications.
Display of the connecting lines:
– Connecting lines of logic values are shown in light green ("TRUE") throughout.
– Blue broken connecting lines are "FALSE".
● Set the properties for "General" and "Parameters" for monitoring in the inspector window.
Selection by activating checkboxes.
● Select individual inputs, outputs or objects.
● In the shortcut menu, select "For Test" to monitor the connection or the object.
The value of the connection is displayed next to the connection
7.4.6 Representations
7.4.6.1 Position blocks according to data flow

Click on the "Position blocks according to data flow" button in the graphic editor. The
function blocks and connections arrange themselves automatically. This function is executed
when the graphic editor is first called for existing parameterization.
The following rules are observed when automatically arranging function blocks and
connections:
● No overlapping of function blocks.
● Function blocks are displayed in a regular column grid
● Function blocks containing exclusively outputs are placed in the column on the extreme
left
● Function blocks containing exclusively inputs are placed in the column on the extreme
right
● Function blocks with inputs and outputs are arranged so as to result in minimum feedback
● By using the three last-named rules, a signal flow from left to right is achieved
● The page layout is automatically adapted. The required number of pages is set
automatically.
It is also ensured that no function blocks are placed on page margins.

7.4 Functions
7.4.6.2 Set colors
Setting the colors of the interconnection lines

In the CFC, the interconnection lines are color-coded depending on the data type. Different
color adaptations are possible. The colors can be modified later.
The colors are assigned to the interconnection lines using the menu command "Options >
Settings > General > Plans > CFC > General".
The data type of the data source is always relevant to the color shown. With interconnections
to operands with undefined data type, the standard value "black" is used.
Define in the menu the colors of the interconnection lines for data type:
● Bool
● Byte
● Word / DWord
● Int / Dint
● Real
● Times
Note
Changes in color assignment
Color assignments have an immediate effect on the display of the interconnection lines in an
opened CFC.
The color settings are stored and are available for further sessions. They apply for all
projects.
With the "Standard values" button, you restore the settings to the standard values.
7.4.6.3 Switching the grid on and off

Click on the "Grid on/off" button to switch the grid on/off in the plan. For manual
optimization of the graphical display, objects are aligned with the grid or with other objects.

7.5 Functions of the toolbar
7.5.1 Transferring the online data to the hardware

Click on the button to transfer the online data to the hardware.
Note
Parameterization changes
In test mode, changes to the input/output parameters of the blocks and instructions are
transferred direct to the device and also adopted into the project.
Such changes do not necessitate renewed loading.
7.5.2 Transferring the online data to the offline project

Click on the button to transfer the online data to the offline project.
During commissioning or when testing a CFC, it is possible to execute and test different
parameter changes online in the device.
When these changes have been successfully tested, they can be read back to the offline
program.
Note
Reading back parameterization changes
Prerequisites:
• Online mode is activated.
• Parameter changes were made in online mode.
7.5.3 Insert text field

Click the button to insert a text field.
● Open a text frame at any point in the plan while holding the left mouse key pressed
● Left-click on the text field and enter your comment.
Moving the text field

● Select the text field
● Press and hold the left mouse button to position the text field at the desired location in the
plan.

Changing the size of the text field

The size of the text frame can be adjusted to suit the available space in the plan.
● Press and hold the left mouse key to drag the handles of the text frame and set the
desired size.
Copying and inserting a text field

● Press the right mouse button and select "Copy Ctrl.+C" in the shortcut menu
● Press the right mouse button and select "Insert Ctrl.+V" in the shortcut menu
● Press and hold the left mouse button to move the text field to the desired location in the
plan.
Edit text field

● Click on the text field for write mode
● Enter, change or delete the text.
Delete text field

● Press the right mouse button and select "Delete Del." in the shortcut menu.
Alternatively you can delete the selected text field with the "Del" key.
7.5.4 Highlight signal flow

Click the button to highlight the signal flow.
The following objects are indicated in color:
● All blocks and connections that indirectly send signals to an input of the selected block
(signal flow on the input side)
● All blocks and connections to which the signals of all outputs of the selected block are
sent directly or indirectly (signal flow on the output side).
Display of the data flow deactivates following:
● Selection of another function block in the plan
● Deletion of a function block in the highlighted plan
● Selection or deletion of a connection
● Click the button.

7.5.5 Select view

Select a button to structure the desired view of the plan.
Buttons
Selection:
● Zoom in
● Show all
● Adapting the selection to the size of the work area
● Zoom out
7.5.6 Zoom in
Click the button to zoom into the view of the plan.
The zoom factor is increased or decreased by a fixed value.
Otherwise:
● Key combination "Ctrl." + "+" on the numerical keypad
● Hold the "Ctrl." key pressed and operate the mousewheel.
7.5.7 Show all

Click on the button to adapt the plan to the size of the work area.
In the "Show all" view, all pages/plans pertaining to the project are shown.
7.5.8 Adapting the selection to the size of the work area

Click the button to select an area of the plan.
● Hold the left mouse button pressed and draw a rectangle over the desired objects of the
plan. The selection is marked.
● Click the button. The selection is adapted to fit the work area.

7.5.9 Zoom out

Click the button to zoom out of the view of the plan.
The zoom factor is increased or decreased by a fixed value.
Otherwise:
● Key combination "Ctrl." + "-" on the numerical keypad
● Hold the "Ctrl." key pressed and operate the mousewheel.
7.5.10 Show/hide unused connections

Click on the "Show/hide unused connections" button. All unused connections are hidden.
A second click on the button shows the connections again.
7.5.11 Activate/deactivate monitoring

Click the "Monitoring on/off" button to switch the function on and off.
The blocks interconnected in the plan are monitored online according to their settings and
specifications.
7.5.12 Delete
Use the menu command "Edit > Delete" to delete one or more selected objects and
connections.
Otherwise:
● Press the "Del" button
● Click the symbol
● "Right mouse button > Delete"
● "Right mouse button > Del key"
Note
By deleting an object, you delete all connections or open connections leading to this block.

Migrating a SIMOCODE pro project 8
8.1 Migrating projects
Migrating project data from SIRIUS ES classic

● Existing project files can be migrated from SIRIUS ES classic (Version 2007 and higher).
The project data is converted to a TIA project. The converted project data can be further
processed in the SIRIUS ES Client (initially only SIMOCODE ES).
● The migration supports only classic project files for one device but no group files. If the
device is not supported in the TIA Client, information is displayed in the inspector window
and the migration is canceled.
Note
If, for example, a specific module is not supported for the SIMOCODE header module,
only this component is not migrated. All other supported modules are migrated.
Information is displayed.

Migrating a SIMOCODE pro project
8.2 Launching the migration
8.2 Launching the migration

The migration can be launched using two commands.
1. Portal view
2. Project view
You select the project file from SIRIUS ES classic via both versions. An appropriate file filter
for *.sdp files (SIRIUS Engineering Files) is registered for this purpose.
After selecting the sdp file, the migration begins. This always involves the creation of a new
project.
Note
• Direct import to an existing TIA project is not possible.
• Information on progress and status is displayed during the migration.
• On completion of the migration, you will find the information "Migration finished" in the
inspector window.
You can also find more information in the general Help of the TIA Information System:
Migrating projects in a TIA portal project
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56314959)

Additional information 9
9.1 Service
9.1.1 Active control stations, contactor controls and lamp controls

The SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS system manuals can be found at the following link: System
manuals (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300)
9.1.2 Diagnostics via LED display
Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFIBUS)
The basic units and the operating panel have three LEDs for displaying specific device
states:
LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults

Device Device status Green Device ON —
Green flickering Internal error Send back the basic unit
Yellow Memory module or addressing plug —
recognized, Test/Reset buttons control
the memory module or addressing
plug
Yellow flashing Memory module / addressing plug —
read in; factory settings restored
(duration: 3 s)
Yellow flickering Memory module programmed —
(duration: 3 s)
Red Parameterization incorrect (also Gen. Parameterize again and switch the
Fault on) control voltage off and on again
Basic unit defective (also Gen. Fault Replace the basic unit!
on)
Red flashing Memory module, addressing plug, Reprogram/replace the memory
expansion modules defective (also module, replace the expansion
Gen. Fault on - flashing) modules
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply voltage
is connected/switched on

Additional information
9.1 Service

Bus Bus status Off Bus not connected or bus fault Connect the bus or check bus
parameters
Green flashing Baud rate recognized / communication —
with PC / programming device
Green Communication with PLC/PCS —
Gen. Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g. overload
Fault Red flashing Fault pending; reset has not been Rectify fault, e.g. overload
saved
Off No error —
Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel
The basic unit and the operating panel have LEDs for displaying specific device states:

Device Device Green Device ON -
status Green flickering Internal error Send back the basic unit
Yellow Memory module recognized, —
TEST/RESET buttons control the
memory module
Yellow flashing Memory module read in; factory —
settings configured (duration: 3 s)
Yellow flickering Memory module programmed —
(duration: 3 s)
Red Device defective (also Gen. Fault on) Replace the basic unit!
Red flashing Memory module or expansion modules Reprogram/replace the memory
defective (also Gen. Fault on - module, replace the expansion
flashing) modules
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply voltage
is connected/switched on
Green flashing PE energy saving mode active —
Bus Bus status Off No communication with the Connect the bus or check
IO Controller of the PLC/PCS parameters (IP parameters, device
name)
Green Communication with the IO Controller —
of the PLC/PCS is active
Gen. Fault Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g. overload
Red flashing Fault pending; reset has not been —
saved
Off No error —

9.1 Service

PORT1 Bus status Green Ethernet connection available —
(only on Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection and
basic unit) the wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location —
active
PORT2 Bus status Green Ethernet connection available —
(only on Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection and
basic unit) the wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location —
active
Diagnostics via LEDs on DM-F Local

The DM-F Local has more than 10 LEDs that display specific device states:
LED display Color Meaning

READY OFF System interface not connected/supply voltage too low/device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Green flashing Device ON/system interface not active or not OK
DEVICE OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Green flashing Self-test
Yellow Configuration mode
Yellow flashing Error in configuration
Red Device defective or faulty
OUT OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Green flashing Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied
IN OFF Input not active
Green Input active
Green flashing Fault detected (e.g. cross-circuit at input, sensor simultaneity not fulfilled)
1 OFF Cross-circuit detection off
Yellow Cross-circuit detection ON
Yellow flashing Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Yellow flickering Error in configuration
2 OFF NC contact/NO contact
Yellow NC contact/NC contact

9.1 Service

3 OFF 2 x single-channel
Yellow 1 x two-channel
4 OFF Delays Y12, Y22, Y34 approx. 50 ms
Yellow Delays Y12, Y22, Y34 approx. 10 ms
5 OFF Sensor circuit, automatic start
Yellow Sensor circuit, monitored start
6 OFF Cascading input 1, automatic start
Yellow Cascading input 1, monitored start
7 OFF With start-up testing
Yellow Without start-up testing
8 OFF Automatic starting after power failure
Yellow No automatic starting after power failure

9.1 Service
Diagnostics via LEDs on DM-F PROFIsafe

The DM-F PROFIsafe has more than 10 LEDs that display specific device states:

OFF
READY OFF System interface not connected/supply voltage too low/device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Green flashing Device ON/system interface not active or not OK
DEVICE OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Green flashing Self-test
Red Device defective or faulty
OUT OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Green flashing Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied
SF OFF No group fault
Red Group fault (PROFIsafe not active, incorrect PROFIsafe address, wiring error,
device defective)
1 Yellow PROFIsafe address 1

9.1 Service
9.1.3 Restoring factory settings

With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.
Restoring the factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
2. Press the Test/Reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The Device LED is yellow.
4. Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
5. Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
6. Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
7. Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
8. The factory setting is restored.
Note
If any of the steps are not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert to normal
operation.
Note
This function is always active, independent of the "TEST/RESET keys disabled" parameter.
Restoring the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Prerequisites: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC/PG via PROFIBUS DP or via the
system interface, and SIMOCODE ES is started.
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Project navigation view, select "Online accesses > COM [Sirius PtP] > Update
accessible stations > SIMOCODE > Commissioning > Command".
2. Click on the "Factory settings" button. The factory settings are restored.
3. "Factory settings OK" is displayed in the inspector window.

9.1 Service
9.1.4 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. The switches are numbered.
Example: Address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
2. Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED is yellow.
3. Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The address you set is now stored. The "Device" LED
flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4. Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.
5. After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message "Download to
device successfully accomplished".
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2. In the Project navigation Devices view, select "Online accesses > COM [Sirius PtP] >
Update accessible stations > SIMOCODE > Parameters > Fieldbus interface".
3. Enter the DP address. After entering a new DP address, the button "Transfer online
data to the hardware" becomes active.
4. Click on the button. The online data is transferred to the hardware. The DP address is
set.
Settings of the PROFIsafe address, DM-F PROFIsafe
See also

9.1 Service
9.1.5 Backing up and saving parameters

Always save the parameters in the memory module or in the project. This particularly applies
if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to transfer data from one basic unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit to the memory module

Proceed as follows:
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for
approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST/RESET" button for approx. 3
seconds. The parameters will be saved in the memory module. After successful data
transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface
Saving parameters from the basic unit to the project

Proceed as follows:
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Select the menu command Online > Download from device. The parameters are loaded
into the main memory from the basic unit.
4. Open the menu command Project > Save as .... The parameters are saved from RAM to
the project.
Saving parameters from the memory module to the basic unit

Proceed as follows:
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for
approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST/RESET" button. The
parameters will be transferred to the basic unit. After successful data transfer, the
"Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface
Note
If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from the memory
module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched on.

9.1 Service
Saving parameters from a project to the basic unit

Proceed as follows:
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Select the menu command Online > Download from device. The parameters are loaded
into the project from RAM.
4. Select the menu command Online > Load to device. The parameters will be saved to the
basic unit from RAM.
9.1.6 Configuring the diagnostics response
Description
In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events trigger the transmission of
diagnostics data or alarms to the PLC:
● Diagnostics for device faults, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults
● Diagnostics for process faults: For events labeled "S" in table B-8: Data set 92 -
Diagnostics in the column headed "DP diagnostics", diagnostics data or alarms are
transferred to the PLC.
● Diagnostics for process warnings: For events labeled "W" in table B-8: Data set 92 -
Diagnostics" in the column headed "DP diagnostics", diagnostics data or alarms are
● Diagnostics for process events: For events labeled "M" in table B-8: Data set 92 -
Diagnostics" in the column headed "DP diagnostics", diagnostics data or alarms are
You can find the system manual for SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS on the Internet
See also
Data set 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 336)
9.1.7 Setting the safety relay functions

See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).

9.1 Service
9.1.8 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components
9.1.8.1 Replacing the basic unit
Replacing SIMOCODE pro C, pro S and pro V basic units

Proceed as follows:
1. Save the parameters (Page 332).
2. Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.
3. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from
the system interface.
4. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
5. Dismantle the basic unit.
6. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic unit.
7. Mount the new basic unit.
8. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
9. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
10. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11. Save (Page 332) the parameters to the basic unit.
12. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.
9.1.8.2 Replacing the expansion module

Proceed as follows:
2. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from
the system interface.
3. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4. Dismantle the expansion module.
5. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic expansion module.
6. Mount the new expansion module.
7. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
8. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.

9.1 Service
9.1.8.3 Replacing a DM-F

See manual "Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)".
9.1.8.4 Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
Safety notices
WARNING
Replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit must be switched
off before replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules.
Note
Please observe the information contained in the operating instructions!
Note
It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to replace the
components!
Proceed as follows:
2. Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3. Withdraw the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below
(current/voltage measuring modules only).
4. Disconnect the 3 cables of the 3 phases of the main circuit.
5. Replace the module.
6. Connect the 3 cables of the main circuit, running them through the feed-through
openings.
7. Plug the removable terminals onto the module
(current/voltage measuring modules only).
8. Connect the cable to the system interface.

9.2 Data sets
9.2 Data sets
9.2.1 Data set 92 - Device diagnostics
Data set 92 - Device diagnostics

See SIMOCODE pro System Manuals
9.2.2 Data set 94 - Measured values
Data set 94 - Measured values

9.2.3 Data set 95 - Service and statistical data


9.3 Examples
9.3 Examples
9.3.1 Examples for the conversion factor
Example 1: Rated motor current 700 A

A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing current
transformer (transformation ratio 820 : 1) and the secondary side is executed once by a
current measuring module 0.3 to 3 A.
Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 1; Is = 700 A
Settings:
Set current Is1: 700 A
Is1 - conversion factor - numerator: 820
Is1 - conversion factor - denominator: 1
Example 2: Rated motor current is 225 A

A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing current
transformer (transformation ratio 820 : 1) and the secondary side is executed twice by a
current measuring module 0.3 to 3 A. Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 2; Is = 225 A
Settings:
Set current Is1: 225 A
Example 3: Rated motor current is 0.25 A

The motor cable is 2x by a current measuring module 0.3 to 3 A for a motor with rated
current 0.25 A: transformation ratio for Is = 1 : 2; Is = 0.25 A
Settings:
Set current Is1: 0.25 A
Note
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set
for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers
is/are used for each speed.

9.3 Examples
9.3.2 Limit monitor example
Example
● The temperature sensors of the temperature module (TM) are to be monitored
individually. If the temperature exceeds 60 °C, the limit monitor is to generate a message.
Note
Please note that the measured values of the temperature sensors are in Kelvin. For this
reason, 273 must be added.
Settings
● Limit monitor - input
TM - temperature 1
● Type
Overshoot, undershoot
● Limit value
333 (temperature available in Kelvin, for this reason, add 273)
9.3.3 Calculator examples
Example 1
● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °C.

9.3 Examples
Example 2
● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F
Example 3
● Conversion of motor current Imax from % to A (e.g. set current Is= 3.36 A)

9.3 Examples

Index
PC or PC/OPC-UA [HMI],
PLC/PCS or PLC/PCS [PN], 184
" Cos phi monitoring, 203
Counter, 265
"At operating temperature" state, 177
Cyclic receive, 225
"TEST/RESET" button, operator panel, 217
Cyclic send, 226, 238
0 D
0/4 - 20 mA monitoring, 206
Delay of the stalled rotor level, 180
Delay prewarning, 178
Delays, 221
3 Description of overload protection, 174
3UF50 basic type, 229 Diagnostics
3UF50 compatibility mode, 229 Basic unit (PROFIBUS), 325
3UF50 operating mode, 229 Basic unit (PROFINET), 326
DM-F Local, 327
DM-F PROFIsafe, 329
A DM inputs, 218
DM1 outputs, 234
Active power monitoring, 204
Acyclic receive, 226
Acyclic send, 240
AM1 output, 236
E
Analog value recording, 227, 310 EEx e applications, 181
Application selection, 159 Emergency start, 253
Auto reset, 249 Exceeding the stalled rotor level, 180
External fault, 247
External ground-fault monitoring, 196
B
Basic unit
SIMOCODE pro C, 157
F
SIMOCODE pro V, 157 Faults/warnings/messages, 288
SIMOCODE pro V (PN), 157 Flashing, 272
Blocking protection, 180 Flicker, 273
BU outputs, 231
Bus monitoring, 258
G
Group diagnostics, 169
C
Calculators, 276
Class, 176 H
Configuration error, 159
Hysteresis, 202
Contactor controls, 189
for voltage:cos phi:power, 202
Control stations
Hysteresis for 0/4 - 20 mA, 207
Local, 184
Operator panel, 184

Index
I R
Internal ground-fault monitoring, 195 Remote reset, 249
Reset, 178
Response to CPU/master STOP, 169
L Response to overload, 177
Restoring factory settings
Lamp controls, 190
with the SIMOCODE ES software, 330
LEDs for device diagnostics
with the Test/Reset button, 330
Basic unit / Operator panel, 325
Limit monitor, 274
Load type, 178
S
Sampling time, 228, 310
M Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to the
basic unit, 333
Mode selector, 186
Saving parameters from the basic unit to a SIMOCODE
Modules, 157
ES file, 332
Analog module 1/2, 157
Saving parameters from the basic unit to the memory
Analog module 2, 157
module, 332
Digital module 1, 157
Saving parameters from the memory module to the
Digital module 2, 157
basic unit, 332
Ground-fault module, 157
Sensor fault, 182
Temperature module 1/2, 157
Set current Is1, 174
Temperature module 2, 157
Set current Is2, 175
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing, 214
Signal conditioning, 268
Motor control
Stalled rotor level, 180
Non-maintained command mode, 191
Startup parameter block, 229
Motor runtimes, 207
Stop time monitoring, 209
Motor stop times, 207
T
N
Temperature monitoring, 211
Non-volatile elements, 270
Test position feedback (TPF), 245
Number of starts monitoring motor, 210
Test/Reset, 249
TEST/RESET, 242
Thermal motor model (thermal memory), 177
O Thermistor
OFF command reset, 249 Motor protection with PTC (binary), 157
OP LED, 233 Thermistor protection, 157
Operating hours monitoring, 209 Thermistor sensor, 157
Operating modes, 185 Thermistor protection, 181
Operation monitoring, 208 Time stamping, 261
Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4, 217 Timer, 267
Overtemperature, 181 Transformation ratio - active, 176
Transformation ratio - primary, 175
Transformation ratio - secondary, 175, 176
P Transformation ratio active, 175
Trip level, 181, 202, 203
Pause time, 178
Truth table 2I/1O, 262
Phase unbalance, 179
PLC/PCS monitoring, 259
Power failure monitoring, 252

Index
W
Waiting for start-up parameter datasets, 169
Warning level, 202, 203
Watchdog, 258
Win SIMOCODE DP converter, 229

Index


Simocode 1

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Simocode 1

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Tooltips SIRIUS +

SIMOCODE ES Online Help ___________________

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help ___________________

Migrating a SIMOCODE pro

Siemens AG Copyright © Siemens AG 2013.

1 Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE ..................................................................................................... 13

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.2.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address...............................................................................................19

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.3.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring) ........................................................................................... 53

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.4.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed ...............................................69

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.4.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode .................................................................................................... 132

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

5.6.9 Non-maintained command mode ...........................................................................................191

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

5.10.2 Test position feedback (TPF)................................................................................................ 245

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

7.4 Functions ..............................................................................................................................315

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.1.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number

1.1.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code

1.1.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager

1.1.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile

1.1.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family

1.1.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily

1.1.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class

1.1.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No.

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.1.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level

1.1.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level

1.1.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter

1.1.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version

1.1.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data

1.1.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp

1.1.2 Fieldbus interface

1.1.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block

1.1.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.1.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address

1.1.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed

1.1.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type

1.1.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages

1.1.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings

1.1.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults

1.1.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.2 Tooltips SiriusPLAT

1.2.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number

1.2.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code

1.2.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager

1.2.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile

1.2.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

1.2.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily

1.2.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class

1.2.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No.

1.2.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level

1.2.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level

1.2.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help